summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/69127-h
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/69127-h')
-rw-r--r--old/69127-h/69127-h.htm7859
-rw-r--r--old/69127-h/images/cover.jpgbin350400 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/69127-h/images/figure1.jpgbin71673 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/69127-h/images/figure2.jpgbin37872 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/69127-h/images/figure3.jpgbin12516 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/69127-h/images/figure4.jpgbin30878 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/69127-h/images/imprimatur.jpgbin14595 -> 0 bytes
7 files changed, 0 insertions, 7859 deletions
diff --git a/old/69127-h/69127-h.htm b/old/69127-h/69127-h.htm
deleted file mode 100644
index 07d4217..0000000
--- a/old/69127-h/69127-h.htm
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7859 +0,0 @@
-<!DOCTYPE html>
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
- <head>
- <meta charset="UTF-8" />
- <title>
- The Project Gutenberg eBook of Bromoil printing and bromoil transfer, by Dr. Emil Mayer.
- </title>
-
- <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover" />
-
- <style> /* <![CDATA[ */
-
-a {
- text-decoration: none;
-}
-
-body {
- margin-left: 10%;
- margin-right: 10%;
-}
-
-h1,h2 {
- text-align: center;
- clear: both;
-}
-
-h2.nobreak {
- page-break-before: avoid;
-}
-
-hr.chap {
- margin-top: 2em;
- margin-bottom: 2em;
- clear: both;
- width: 65%;
- margin-left: 17.5%;
- margin-right: 17.5%;
-}
-
-img.w100 {
- width: 100%;
-}
-
-div.chapter {
- page-break-before: always;
-}
-
-ul {
- list-style-type: none;
-}
-
-li {
- margin-top: .5em;
- padding-left: 2em;
- text-indent: -2em;
-}
-
-p {
- margin-top: 0.5em;
- text-align: justify;
- margin-bottom: 0.5em;
- text-indent: 1em;
-}
-
-table {
- margin: 1em auto 1em auto;
- max-width: 40em;
- border-collapse: collapse;
-}
-
-td {
- padding-left: 2.25em;
- padding-right: 0.25em;
- vertical-align: top;
- text-indent: -2em;
- text-align: justify;
-}
-
-.tdc {
- text-align: center;
- padding-top: 0.75em;
- padding-left: 0.25em;
- text-indent: 0;
-}
-
-.tdr {
- text-align: right;
- padding-left: 0.25em;
- text-indent: 0;
-}
-
-.tdpg {
- vertical-align: bottom;
- text-align: right;
- padding-left: 0.25em;
- text-indent: 0;
-}
-
-.box {
- margin: auto;
- max-width: 35em;
- padding: 0.5em;
- border-top: double black;
- border-bottom: double black;
- border-left: thin solid black;
- border-right: thin solid black;
-}
-
-.box .double-underline {
- margin: auto;
- width: 90%;
- border-bottom: double black;
-}
-
-.caption {
- text-align: center;
- margin-bottom: 1em;
- font-size: 90%;
- text-indent: 0em;
-}
-
-.center {
- text-align: center;
- text-indent: 0em;
-}
-
-.figcenter {
- margin: auto;
- text-align: center;
-}
-
-.larger {
- font-size: 150%;
-}
-
-.pagenum {
- position: absolute;
- right: 4%;
- font-size: smaller;
- text-align: right;
- font-style: normal;
-}
-
-.right {
- text-align: right;
-}
-
-.smaller {
- font-size: 80%;
-}
-
-.smcap {
- font-variant: small-caps;
- font-style: normal;
-}
-
-.titlepage {
- text-align: center;
- margin-top: 3em;
- text-indent: 0em;
-}
-
-.x-ebookmaker img {
- max-width: 100%;
- width: auto;
- height: auto;
-}
-
-/* Illustration classes */
-.illowp100 {width: 100%;}
-.illowp30 {width: 30%;}
-.x-ebookmaker .illowp30 {width: 100%;}
-.illowp61 {width: 61%;}
-.x-ebookmaker .illowp61 {width: 100%;}
-.illowp66 {width: 66%;}
-.x-ebookmaker .illowp66 {width: 100%;}
-.illowp75 {width: 75%;}
-.x-ebookmaker .illowp75 {width: 100%;}
- /* ]]> */ </style>
- </head>
-<body>
-<p style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Bromoil printing and bromoil transfer, by Dr. Emil Mayer</p>
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
-at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
-are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
-country where you are located before using this eBook.
-</div>
-
-<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Bromoil printing and bromoil transfer</p>
-<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Dr. Emil Mayer</p>
-<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Translator: Frank Roy Fraprie, S.M, F.R.P.S.</p>
-<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: October 10, 2022 [eBook #69127]</p>
-<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</p>
- <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; text-align:left'>Produced by: Charlene Taylor and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)</p>
-<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BROMOIL PRINTING AND BROMOIL TRANSFER ***</div>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_i"></a>[i]</span></p>
-
-<p class="titlepage larger">BROMOIL PRINTING<br />
-<span class="smaller">AND</span><br />
-BROMOIL TRANSFER</p>
-
-<p class="titlepage"><span class="smaller">BY</span><br />
-DR. EMIL MAYER<br />
-<span class="smaller">PRESIDENT OF THE VIENNA CLUB OF AMATEUR PHOTOGRAPHERS</span></p>
-
-<p class="titlepage"><i>AUTHORIZED TRANSLATION<br />
-FROM THE SEVENTH GERMAN EDITION</i></p>
-
-<p class="center"><span class="smaller">BY</span><br />
-FRANK ROY FRAPRIE, S.M., F.R.P.S.<br />
-<span class="smaller">EDITOR OF AMERICAN PHOTOGRAPHY</span></p>
-
-<div class="figcenter titlepage illowp66" style="max-width: 12.5em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/imprimatur.jpg" alt="" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="titlepage">AMERICAN PHOTOGRAPHIC PUBLISHING CO.,<br />
-<span class="smaller">BOSTON 17, MASSACHUSETTS<br />
-1923</span></p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_ii"></a>[ii]</span></p>
-
-<p class="titlepage smaller"><span class="smcap">Copyright</span>, 1923<br />
-BY AMERICAN PHOTOGRAPHIC PUBLISHING CO.</p>
-
-<p class="center smaller"><i>Manufactured in the United States of America</i><br />
-<i>Electrotyped and printed, March, 1923</i></p>
-
-<p class="titlepage smaller">THE PLIMPTON PRESS<br />
-NORWOOD·MASS·U·S·A</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_iii"></a>[iii]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="PREFACE">PREFACE</h2>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>The bromoil process has always been one in which
-it has seemed difficult to attain success. Though
-many books and articles on the subject have been published,
-every writer seems to give different directions and
-every experimenter to have difficulty in following them.
-The consequence is that almost every successful experimenter
-with this process has developed methods of his
-own and has frequently been unable to impart them to
-others. One reason for this has been that each make
-of bromide paper varies in its characteristics from the
-others and that methods, which are successful with one,
-do not always succeed with another. Various bleaching
-solutions have been described, and, as the bleaching
-solution has two functions—bleaching and tanning,
-which progress with different speeds at different temperatures—a
-lack of attention on this point has doubtless
-been a frequent cause of unsuccess. Little attention
-has also been paid to the necessity for observing the
-temperature of the water used for soaking the print.
-The author of the present book has investigated these
-various points very carefully, and for the first time, perhaps,
-has brought to the attention of the photographic
-reader the need for an accurate knowledge of the effect
-of these different variables.</p>
-
-<p>In the following book he describes only a single
-method of work, without variations until the process is
-learned, though he does describe various methods of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_iv"></a>[iv]</span>
-work which may be used to vary results by the experienced
-worker. His method of instruction is logical and
-based on accepted educational principles. He describes
-one step at a time fully and carefully, explains the
-reasons for adopting it, and then proceeds to the next
-step in like manner. We feel sure that every reader, who
-will be reasonably careful in his methods of work and
-will follow these instructions literally, will learn how to
-make a good bromoil print. After attaining success
-in this way, the variations may be tried, if desired.</p>
-
-<p>While the author gives instructions for testing out
-papers to see if they are suitable, it may be advisable
-to record here the results of some American and English
-workers. H. G. Cleveland in <span class="smcap">American Photography</span>
-for February, 1923, recommends, in addition to
-the papers specially marked by their makers as bromoil
-grades, the following: Eastman Portrait Bromide; P.
-M. C., Nos. 7 and 8; and Wellington, Cream Crayon
-Smooth, Rough, or Extra Rough. He suggests that a
-rough test may be made of a new brand of paper by
-placing a small test strip in water at 120° to 140°
-Fahrenheit for a few minutes and then scraping the
-emulsion surface with a knife blade. If the coating
-is entirely soft and jelly-like, it will probably be suitable
-for the process. If it is tough and leathery, it will
-be unsuitable, and, if a portion of the coating is soft but
-the other portion tough, then it will also be unsuitable.
-His experience is that Wellington Bromoil paper is entirely
-suitable for the process. Chris J. Symes in
-<i>The British Journal of Photography</i> for December 1,
-1922, recommends for bromoil the following English
-papers: Kodak Royal, white and toned; Vitegas,
-specially prepared for bromoil; Barnet Cream Crayon<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_v"></a>[v]</span>
-Natural Surface, Rough Ordinary and Tiger Tongue.
-For transfer, he has found the following suitable:
-Kodak Royal, white and toned; Kodak Velvet; Barnet
-Smooth Ordinary; and Barnet Semi-matt Card.</p>
-
-<p>The reader who is interested in bromoil transfer, will
-find the directions of Mr. Guttmann on this process
-slightly different from those of Dr. Mayer in minor
-points, but the worker who is far enough advanced to
-essay this difficult process will be able to recognize these
-discrepancies and choose the process which seems more
-useful to himself.</p>
-
-<p>Metal etcher’s presses for transfer are sold at comparatively
-high prices in the United States, but second
-hand ones may often be found in the larger cities. Small
-wooden mangles with maple rolls may be had at fairly
-low prices from dealers in laundry supplies, and have
-been found to be useful.</p>
-
-<p>Following the style of the German original, italics
-have been freely used for the purpose of calling attention
-to the most important stages of the process, rather
-than for the ordinary purposes of emphasis.</p>
-
-<p>Grateful acknowledgment is made to Mr. E. J. Wall
-for assistance in the first draft of the translation, and
-also in revision of the proofs.</p>
-
-<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Frank Roy Fraprie.</span></p>
-
-<p class="smaller"><span class="smcap">Boston</span>, February, 1923.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_vi"></a>[vi]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CONTENTS">CONTENTS</h2>
-
-</div>
-
-<table>
- <tr>
- <td></td>
- <td class="tdpg smaller">PAGE</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">Preface</span></td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#PREFACE">iii</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">Contents</span></td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CONTENTS">vi</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">Preliminary remarks</span></td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#PRELIMINARY_REMARKS">1</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td colspan="2" class="tdc">CHAPTER I</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">Production of the Bromide Print</span>—Definition of Perfect
- Print—The Choice of the Paper—Development—Control
- of the Silver Bromide Print—Fixation</td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_I">10</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td colspan="2" class="tdc">CHAPTER II</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">The Removal of the Silver Image</span>—Bleaching—The
- Intermediate Drying</td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_II">29</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td colspan="2" class="tdc">CHAPTER III</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">The Inking-up</span>—The Production of the
- Differential Swelling—The
- Properties of the Relief and Its Influence on
- the Character of the Picture—Effect of Warm Water—Effect
- of Ammonia—The Utensils—Brushes—The
- Inks—The Support—Removal of the Water from the
- Surface of the Print—The Brush Work—Use of Dissolved
- Inks—Use of Rollers—Resoaking of the Print
- during the Working-up—Removal of the Ink from the
- Surface—Failures—Alteration of the Character of the
- Picture by the Inking—The Structure of the Ink—Different
- Methods of Working—Hard Ink Technique
- (Coarse-grain Prints)—Soft Ink Technique—Sketch
- Technique—Large Heads—Oil Painting Style—Night
- Pictures—Prints with White Margins—The Swelled-grain
- Image—Mixing the Inks—Polychrome Bromoils</td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_III">38</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td colspan="2" class="tdc">CHAPTER IV</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">After-Treatment of the Finished Print</span>—Defatting the
- Ink Film—Retouching the Print—Refatting of the
- Print—Application of Ink to Dry Prints</td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">104</a><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_vii"></a>[vii]</span></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td colspan="2" class="tdc">CHAPTER V</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">Transfer Methods</span>—Simple Transfer—Combination
- Transfer with One Print-plate—Shadow Print—High
- Light Print—Combination Transfer from Two Prints</td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_V">115</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td colspan="2" class="tdc">CHAPTER VI</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">Oil vs. Bromoil</span></td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">134</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td colspan="2" class="tdc">CHAPTER VII</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">Bromoil Transfer</span>, by Eugen Guttmann—The Bromoil
- Print—The Choice of the Paper—The Machine—Printing—Combination
- Printing with One Bromoil—The
- Value of Combination Printing—Retouching and
- Working-Up—Drying</td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">142</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td colspan="2" class="tdc">CHAPTER VIII</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td><span class="smcap">The Preparation of Bromoil Inks</span>, by Eugen Guttmann—The
- Varnish—Powder—Colors—Tools—Practice of
- Ink Grinding—Ink Mixing—Permanency—Ink Grinding
- Machines</td>
- <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">176</a></td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_1"></a>[1]</span></p>
-
-<h1>BROMOIL PRINTING AND BROMOIL TRANSFER</h1>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="PRELIMINARY_REMARKS">PRELIMINARY REMARKS</h2>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>We all know what great progress photography has
-made in the last few years. The most obvious
-sign of this advance is the fact that it has gradually
-escaped from the practice of literal reproduction of the
-objects seen by the lens, and slowly attained to the rank
-of a recognized means of artistic expression, so that it
-can justly be considered as a new branch which has
-grown out of the old tree of reproductive art. This
-pleasing development may primarily be ascribed to the
-fact that the practice of photography, which was originally
-confined almost exclusively to professional workers,
-has gradually spread and has become a means of recreation
-to the multitude in their leisure hours. It was the
-amateur who demanded new methods and apparatus and
-thus gave a new impulse to photographic manufacturing.
-Improvements of the most fundamental character were
-made in optical apparatus, in the construction of cameras
-of the most varied types, and in the fabrication of plates
-and films. An extraordinary number of novelties has
-appeared in these lines in the course of time; modern
-photographic apparatus makes possible the solution of
-problems which would not have been attempted a few
-years ago, and improvements are still appearing.</p>
-
-<p>The situation in the matter of printing processes is
-quite different. We are provided with apparatus and
-sensitive material for the production of the photographic<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_2"></a>[2]</span>
-negative, in a perfection which leaves nothing to be desired.
-To produce a print from the negative, however,
-we had until recently no positive processes which were
-not well-known to previous generations. This may be
-confirmed by a glance at any photographic textbook
-written around 1880. The various printing processes,
-platinum, bromide, carbon, and gum, which were until
-recently the alpha and omega of printing technique, had
-been known for decades. Compared with the methods
-for the production of negatives, printing methods showed
-practically no advance; they remained in complete stagnation.
-We can scarcely consider as an exception certain
-new methods brought forward in recent years, which
-proved unsuccessful and quickly disappeared from
-practice.</p>
-
-<p>These facts can only be explained by remembering
-that the positive processes, which were available to
-photographers and with which they had to be satisfied,
-were rather numerous and offered a considerable variety
-of effects. Nevertheless, a single characteristic was
-common to all previously known photographic printing
-processes—their inflexibility. Each of these processes,
-in spite of its individual peculiarities, could do nothing
-more than exactly reproduce the negative which was
-to be printed. It was possible to produce certain modifications
-of the negative image as a whole, by printing
-it darker or lighter, or by using a harder or softer working
-process. Changes on the negative itself for the purpose
-of giving a more artistic rendering must, however,
-always be very carefully thought out in advance and
-effected by retouching, often difficult and not within the
-power of every photographer, or by other methods which
-change the negative itself. If such modifications of the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_3"></a>[3]</span>
-negative proved unsuccessful, it was irreparably lost; if
-they succeeded, the plate, as a rule, could no longer be
-used in any different manner. The possibility of undertaking
-radical changes which might realize the artistic
-intentions of the worker on the print itself, in order to
-save the negative, and especially of planning and carrying
-out the deviations from the original negative, which
-expressed the worker’s artistic feelings, during the printing,
-was not afforded by any previously known printing
-methods. A single exception was found in gum printing,
-if the production of the image was divided into a
-series of partial printings. Each of these phases, however,
-was in itself incapable of modification except for
-the possibility of doing a certain small amount of retouching;
-nevertheless, by means of efficient management
-of the single printings and by properly combining them,
-beautiful artistic effects could be obtained. This, however,
-required an extraordinary amount of practice and
-skill, and a very considerable expenditure of time, and
-it must also be remembered that the failure of one of
-the last printings often destroyed all the previous work.
-Also, in gum printing, to have a reasonable expectation
-of success, the work must be thought out from the very
-beginning and carried out in exact accordance with a
-plan from which it was scarcely possible to deviate
-during the work, even when it became apparent that
-the desired result could not be satisfactorily obtained.</p>
-
-<p>The possibility of planning results during the course
-of the printing and carrying them out directly on the
-print itself did not previously exist.</p>
-
-<p>The first process to bring us nearer to this ideal and
-make possible a freer method of working was oil printing.
-The technique of this process consisted in sensitizing<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_4"></a>[4]</span>
-paper which had been coated with a layer of gelatine,
-by means of a solution of potassium bichromate, and
-of printing it under the negative. The yellowish image
-was then washed out; the bichromate had, however, produced
-various degrees of tanning of the gelatine, corresponding
-to the various densities of the silver deposit
-in the negative. The lighter portions, which had been
-protected from the action of light by the dense parts
-of the negative, retained their original power of swelling
-and could therefore later absorb water. The shadows,
-however, corresponding to the transparent parts of the
-negative, were tanned, had lost their absorptive power,
-and had become incapable of taking up water. Consequently,
-the high lights swelled up fully in water, the
-shadows remained unchanged, and the middle tones
-showed various degrees of swelling corresponding to the
-gradation of the negative. If the print was blotted off
-and greasy inks spread upon it by means of a properly
-shaped brush, the inks were entirely repelled by the
-swollen high lights which had absorbed water, and completely
-retained by the fully tanned shadows, while the
-middle tones, in proportion to the amount of tanning,
-retained or repelled the greasy ink more or less completely.</p>
-
-<p>In this process, for the first time, there was found a
-possibility of changing various parts of the image absolutely
-at the worker’s will, even during the progress of
-the work. By the use of harder or softer inks it was
-possible to color the swollen high lights more deeply,
-or to hold back the shadows so that they did not take
-up all the ink that was possible. It was possible to
-leave certain parts of the print entirely untouched and
-work up other parts to the highest degree; in short, oil<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_5"></a>[5]</span>
-printing opened the way to free artistic handling of
-the print.</p>
-
-<p>Thus, the oil process was the first photographic printing
-process in which we were completely emancipated
-from the previous inflexibility which ruled in all printing.</p>
-
-<p>Nevertheless, a number of disadvantages attach to oil
-printing which hinder its general use. The most important
-shortcoming of this process is that bichromated
-gelatine as a printing medium can only reproduce a
-comparatively short scale of tone values. The production
-of prints from contrasty negatives is therefore impossible,
-for the shadows are much overprinted before
-details appear in the high lights, or on the other hand,
-there is no detail in the lights if the shadows are fully
-printed. This difficulty can be only partly overcome
-by the most skilful use of inks of various consistency.
-It is indeed possible to ink up the lights by the use of
-very soft ink, but this does not replace the missing
-details; and overprinted shadows, which it is tried to
-improve by keeping down the quantity of ink applied,
-appear empty. Thus it happens that most of the oil
-prints yet exhibited show a certain muddy family likeness,
-which, at first, when the process was new, was
-considered to be advantageous on account of the novelty
-of the effect, but later received deserved criticism. A
-second disadvantage of the oil print is the fact that it is
-not possible to observe the progress of the printing on
-the bichromated gelatine film. The brownish image on
-a yellow background is very deceiving, and it is usually
-necessary to determine the proper amount of printing
-for each individual negative by actual experiment, and
-to make additional prints by means of a photometer.</p>
-
-<p>Another inconvenience of other previously known<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_6"></a>[6]</span>
-printing processes, to which oil printing is also subject,
-comes from the fact that the great majority of negatives
-are now made with small cameras. On account of the
-extraordinary perfection of modern objectives, the small
-negatives produced by modern hand cameras can be
-enlarged practically without limit. The advantages of
-a portable camera are so considerable that large and
-heavy tripod cameras have practically gone out of use,
-except for certain special purposes. On the other hand,
-however, direct prints from small negatives are, as a
-rule, entirely unsatisfactory from an artistic standpoint.
-If we desire to use any of the previously mentioned
-positive processes, including oil, to produce artistic effects,
-we must first make an enlarged negative. This
-requires, in the first place, the production of a glass
-transparency from the small negative, from which we
-may prepare the desired enlarged working negative.</p>
-
-<p>Various workers held various views as to whether this
-requirement were a help or a hindrance, but it was
-universally accepted as a necessity. The way from the
-plate to the enlarged negative, nevertheless, always remained
-uncertain, tedious, and expensive. Simple as it
-may appear to be, it includes a whole series of stages
-where it is possible to come to grief. At every single
-step lurks the danger that undesired changes of gradation
-in the negative may result from inaccuracy in exposure
-and development, from the use of improperly chosen
-sensitive material, and from various other causes, and
-even if these factors are all correctly handled, there is
-still an unavoidable loss of detail. Therefore the path
-from the small original negative to the enlarged negative
-necessary in previously used processes is neither simple
-nor safe.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_7"></a>[7]</span></p>
-
-<p>Naturally it was also necessary to travel this wearisome
-path in working the oil process, when it was desired to
-make large prints from small negatives.</p>
-
-<p>When it was announced in England that Welborne
-Piper had discovered a process which started from a
-finished silver bromide print instead of from a gelatine
-film sensitized with bichromate, new vistas were opened.
-If the process should prove to be practically useful, we
-could consider that all the previously mentioned difficulties
-were overcome at a single stroke.</p>
-
-<p>The principle of this process, <i>bromoil printing</i>, is the
-removal of the silver image from a finished silver bromide
-print by means of a bleaching solution while,
-simultaneously with the solution of the silver image, the
-gelatine film is tanned in such a way in relation to the
-previously present image that the portions of gelatine
-which represent the high lights of the image preserve
-their capability of swelling, while the shadows of the
-image are tanned.</p>
-
-<p><i>Therefore the bromoil process is a modification of oil
-printing, based not upon a bichromated gelatine film,
-but upon a completed bromide print.</i> This represents
-extraordinary progress. The two previously mentioned
-disadvantages of oil printing are completely avoided in
-the bromoil process. We now have at our command the
-far longer scale of tone values of bromide paper and
-we can use the great possibilities of modification allowed
-by the highly developed bromide process. The difficulties
-of printing are completely removed, for we have at our
-command a perfectly visible image as a starting point.
-A further advantage which can not be too highly estimated
-is inherent in the bromoil process: <i>complete independence
-of the size of the original negative</i>.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_8"></a>[8]</span></p>
-
-<p>When I began my investigations in the field of bromoil
-printing, the process had, as far as practical value
-went, only a purely theoretical existence, as is the case
-in the early days of most photographic processes. The
-fact that it was possible to produce images on a bleached
-bromide print by the application of greasy inks was
-well established. The practical application of the process
-was absolutely uncertain and only occasionally were
-satisfactory results obtained. Most of the prints produced
-in this way were flat and muddy. It is easy to
-understand that the process could find no widespread
-popularity while it was so incompletely worked out.
-The researches, which I then began, showed that most
-bromide papers took up greasy inks after development
-by any method and subsequent bleaching of the image.
-The pictures thus obtained, however, were muddy, flat,
-and not amenable to control, and therefore were less
-satisfactory than the bromide prints from which I had
-started. During the course of my work, I have succeeded
-in obviating these difficulties, in the first place, by preparing
-a satisfactory bleaching solution, next, by determining
-what properties bromide paper must possess in
-order to give perfect bromoil prints, and, finally, by
-working out a series of other necessary conditions, which
-I have described in this book and which must be adhered
-to if the process is to work smoothly and certainly,
-and produce satisfactory results.</p>
-
-<p>The bromoil process, which is now completely mastered,
-offers, in brief, the following advantages:</p>
-
-<p>Simplicity, certainty and controllability of the printing
-material;</p>
-
-<p>Independence of the size of the negative and easy
-production of enlarged artistic prints;</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_9"></a>[9]</span></p>
-
-<p>Freedom in the choice of basic stock and its surface;</p>
-
-<p>The possibility of freely producing on the print any
-desired deviations from the negative, during the work;</p>
-
-<p>Full mastery of the tone values without dependence
-on those of the negative;</p>
-
-<p>Independence of daylight, both in printing and in
-working up the print;</p>
-
-<p>The possibility of the most radical alterations of the
-print as a whole and in part during the work;</p>
-
-<p>Freedom of choice of colors;</p>
-
-<p>The possibility of preparing polychromatic prints with
-any desired choice of colors, and complete freedom in
-the handling of the colors;</p>
-
-<p>The possibility of comprehensive and harmonious modifications
-of the finished print;</p>
-
-<p>The possibility of producing prints on any desired kind
-of non-sensitized paper by the method of transfer.</p>
-
-<p>The description of working methods will be divided
-into the following phases:</p>
-
-<table>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">I.</td>
- <td>Production of the bromide print;</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">II.</td>
- <td>Removal of the silver image;</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">III.</td>
- <td>Application of the ink;</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">IV.</td>
- <td>After-treatment of the finished print.</td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_10"></a>[10]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I<br />
-<span class="smaller">PRODUCTION OF THE BROMIDE PRINT</span></h2>
-
-</div>
-
-<p><i>Failures in the bromoil process in the great majority
-of cases can be ascribed to the fact that the
-basic bromide print was not satisfactory.</i> Therefore the
-method of preparation of the bromide print or enlargement
-deserves the most careful consideration, for the
-bromide print is the most important factor in the preparation
-of a bromoil print. <i>The beginner, especially, can
-not proceed too carefully in making his bromide print.</i></p>
-
-<p>Because of the extraordinary importance of this point,
-we must first define what is here meant by a perfect
-bromide print.</p>
-
-<p>In deciding how to produce a satisfactory bromide
-print as a basis for a bromoil, we must exclude from
-consideration esthetic or artistic grounds.</p>
-
-<p><i>The bromide print must be technically absolutely perfect,
-that is, it must have absolutely clean high lights,
-well graded middle tones, and dense shadows.</i> Especial
-stress must be laid on the brilliancy of the high lights.
-It is best to compare these high lights with an edge of
-the paper which has not been exposed and is not fogged
-or, even better, with the back of the paper. The highest
-lights should show scarcely a trace of a silver precipitate
-and must therefore be almost as white as the paper
-itself. <i>Negatives which do not allow of the production
-of prints as perfect as this should not be used while the
-bromoil process is being learned.</i></p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_11"></a>[11]</span></p>
-
-<p>This apparently superfluous definition of a perfect
-bromide print has to be given in this way, because it
-only too often occurs in practice that <i>the worker himself
-is not clear as to what is meant by the expression,
-perfect bromide print</i>. This may be partly ascribed to
-the fact that the silver bromide process—whether rightly
-or wrongly need not be determined here—has not been
-properly appreciated among amateurs who are striving
-for artistic results. Bromide printing has frequently
-been considered not to be satisfactory as an artistic
-means of expression, and has therefore been considerably
-neglected. In many quarters it is considered as just
-good enough for beginners.</p>
-
-<p>Nevertheless, the bromide process is <i>per se</i> an uncommonly
-flexible method and gives, even with a very
-considerable amount of overexposure or underexposure,
-that is, even when very badly handled, results which are
-considered usable. It is even possible that an improperly
-made bromide print, one for instance, which is soft and
-foggy, might in some circles be considered as esthetically
-more interesting than a perfect print. This is an undeniable
-advantage of the process. It may also become
-a danger, if an imperfect bromide print is used as a
-starting point in the bromoil process. If anyone is not
-sure on this point, let him compare his own bromide
-prints with such samples as are frequently shown by
-manufacturers in window displays and sample books.
-He will then see what richness of tones and wealth of
-gradation are inherent in the process. <i>If, however, an
-imperfect silver bromide print is used as a starting point
-for a bromoil, it can not be expected that the latter will
-display all the possibilities of this process.</i> If the
-bromide print is muddy, the work of inking will be difficult,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_12"></a>[12]</span>
-and it will be impossible to obtain clean high
-lights. If it is underexposed and too contrasty, it can
-not be expected that the bromoil will show details in the
-high lights which were lacking in the bromide print.
-If the worker himself does not know that his silver
-bromide print is faulty, he is inclined to ascribe the
-difficulties which he finds in making the bromoil print
-and his dissatisfaction with the results, to the bromoil
-process itself. Most of the unsatisfactory results in
-bromoil work must be ascribed to the imperfect quality
-of the bromide print which is used, and this is the more
-important as this lack is not perceptible to the eye after
-the bleaching is completed. <i>Whoever, therefore, desires
-to successfully practice bromoil printing, must first decide
-impartially and critically whether he actually knows
-how to make bromide prints, and must acquire full
-mastery of this process.</i></p>
-
-<p>The technically perfect bromide print made from a
-properly graded negative can, as will later be described,
-have its gradations changed in the bromoil process without
-any difficulty, and thus be made softer or more
-contrasty. The advanced bromoil printer who is a
-thorough master of the technique of the process will
-therefore easily be able to work even with poor negatives;
-when making his bromide prints from such
-negatives, he will consider the ideas which he intends to
-incorporate in the bromoil print and will make his
-bromide print harder or softer than the negative and
-at the same time retain the necessary cleanness of the
-high lights.</p>
-
-<p>The best starting point for a bromoil print, however,
-especially for the beginner, is and must be a bromide
-print as nearly perfect as possible.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_13"></a>[13]</span></p>
-
-<p>A suggestion for the certain obtaining of such prints
-may be added here. When we are working with a negative
-with strong high lights, judgment as to the freedom
-of the bromide print from fog by comparison with an
-unexposed edge is not difficult. This is not the case
-with negatives which show no well marked high lights.
-In such cases it is advisable to <i>determine what is underexposure</i>
-by making test strips in which details in the
-high lights and middle tones are lacking and, working
-from this point, determine by gradual increase of exposure
-the correct time which gives a perfectly clean
-print.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Choice of the Paper.</span>—One of the most important
-problems is to find a suitable paper for the
-process. Not all of the bromide papers which are on
-the market will give satisfactory results. <i>It is only possible
-to use papers whose swelling power has not been
-too completely removed in process of manufacture by
-the use of hardeners.</i> The principle of the bromoil
-process is that a tanning of the gelatine shall occur
-simultaneously with the bleaching of the silver bromide
-image. As we have already remarked, this does not
-affect the high lights and leaves them still absorbent,
-while the shadows are tanned and therefore become incapable
-of taking up water. The half-tones are tanned
-or hardened to an intermediate degree and therefore can
-take up a certain amount of water. <i>Therefore, in place
-of the vanished silver image, we get a totally or partially
-invisible tanned image in the gelatine film.</i></p>
-
-<p>The variously hardened parts of the gelatine film,
-corresponding to the various portions of the vanished
-bromide image, display the property acquired through
-different degrees of tanning by the fact that the portions<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_14"></a>[14]</span>
-of the gelatine which remain unhardened and which
-correspond to the high lights of the silver image
-formerly present, absorb water greedily. Consequently
-they swell up and acquire a certain shininess, because
-of their water content; in addition they generally
-rise above the other parts of the gelatine film, which
-contain little or no water, and give a certain amount
-of relief when they are fully swelled. The portions of
-the film in which the deep shadows of the bromide image
-lay are completely tanned through, can therefore take up
-no water, and remain matt and sunken. This graded
-swelling of the gelatine film becomes more apparent, the
-higher the temperature of the water in which the film is
-swollen.</p>
-
-<p>If, however, the paper was strongly tanned in the
-process of manufacture, the gelatine has already lost all
-or most of its swelling power before it is printed and,
-although the bleaching solution in such cases can indeed
-remove the silver image, it can no longer develop the
-differences of absorptive power which are necessary for
-a bromoil print; for, although the bleaching solution can
-harden an untanned gelatine layer, it cannot bring back
-the lost power of swelling to a film which is already
-hardened through and through.</p>
-
-<p>Therefore bromide papers which have already been
-very thoroughly hardened in manufacture show no trace
-of relief after bleaching, and very slight, if any, shininess
-in the lights. This is the case especially with those
-white, smooth, matt, heavyweight papers which are
-especially used for postcard printing. When such papers
-are taken out of the solutions, as a rule, these run off
-quickly and leave an almost dry surface. It is generally
-not possible to make satisfactory bromoil prints on such<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_15"></a>[15]</span>
-papers. It is true that the image can be inked by protracted
-labor; it is, however, muddy and flat and, as a
-rule, cannot be essentially improved even by the use of
-very warm water. Other types of bromide paper which
-have not been so thoroughly hardened may show no relief
-after bleaching, yet, after the surface water has been
-removed, they do show a certain small amount of shininess
-in the high lights when carefully inspected sidewise.
-With such papers the necessary differences of swelling
-can generally be developed if, as will later be more completely
-described, they are soaked in very warm water
-or in an ammoniacal solution. It is rare to find in commerce
-silver bromide papers which have not been hardened
-at all, or only very slightly hardened, in their
-manufacture. Such papers, because their films are very
-susceptible to mechanical injury, are not likely to stand
-the wear and tear of the various baths. On the other
-hand, as a rule, they usually produce a strong relief
-even in cold water, and therefore tend to produce hard
-prints. The greatest adaptability for bromoil printing
-may be anticipated from bromide papers which are
-moderately hardened during manufacture.</p>
-
-<p>To determine whether a given brand of bromide paper
-is suitable for bromoil work, an unexposed sheet of the
-paper should be dipped in water at a temperature of
-about 30° C. (86° F.) and the behavior of the gelatine
-film observed. If this swells up considerably and becomes
-slippery and shiny, the paper has the necessary
-swelling power and can be used with success.</p>
-
-<p>On account of the great variety of bromide papers
-which are on the market, we have a very wide choice as
-regards the thickness and color of the paper and the
-structure of its surface. It may be remarked here that<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_16"></a>[16]</span>
-papers of any desired surface, even rough and coarse
-grained papers, can be used for bromoil printing, as
-easily as papers with a smooth surface. The difficulties
-experienced with very rough surfaced papers in some
-other processes do not exist in bromoil. Because of the
-elasticity of its hairs, the brush carries the ink as easily
-into the hollows of the surface as to its high points.</p>
-
-<p>The thickness of the paper is of no importance in
-bromoil printing, except that the handling of the thicker
-papers is easier, because they lie flatter during the work
-and distort less on drying; also, as a rule, thick papers
-are easier to ink.</p>
-
-<p><i>Gaslight papers</i> can also be used if their gelatine films
-satisfy the above mentioned requirements. Therefore
-we have the widest possible choice in the printing materials
-for bromoil.</p>
-
-<p>A great number of bromide papers of different manufacturers
-are well suited for bromoil printing; it is, however,
-advisable to make a preliminary investigation as
-to the amount of hardening they have undergone, for
-it occasionally happens that different emulsions of the
-same brand show quite different grades of hardening,
-so that on one occasion it is possible to make bromoil
-prints on them without the least difficulty, while the same
-paper at another time may absolutely refuse to take the
-ink. On account of the great popularity of the bromoil
-process in recent years, it can be easily understood that
-some manufacturers might seek a wider sale for their
-products by claiming for them a special suitability for
-this process. It is therefore a wise precaution to previously
-test even those brands which are advertised as
-specially adapted for bromoil printing, and not to depend
-too much on such claims.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_17"></a>[17]</span></p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Development.</span>—The processes of tanning in the film
-of a bromide print, produced by the bleaching of the
-silver image, which will be described later, are of an
-extremely subtle nature. We must therefore endeavor
-to avoid all causes for damage in this process and
-especially everything which tends to harden the whole
-film even to the slightest degree. Any tanning, which
-affects the whole gelatine film, has the same effect as
-general fog in a negative. It is well known that almost
-all the developers used in photography have more or less
-tendency to harden the gelatine film. A very considerable
-damage to the bromoil print through the use of a
-tanning developer might naturally be imperceptible to
-the eye. Yet this may at times manifest itself in a very
-undesirable and disturbing form, especially when the
-bromide paper has been so much hardened in manufacture
-that it possesses only just the necessary qualification
-for bromoil printing. It may then happen that the last
-remainder of swelling capacity can be taken from the
-paper by the use of a tanning developer. However desirable
-it might be and however it might simplify the
-process to be able to use any desired developer in producing
-the bromide print, to avoid trouble it must be
-observed that the use of developers which tan the film
-may seriously influence the result, even though it is possible
-to get some kind of prints in many cases. <i>If the
-worker is absolutely sure that the bromide paper which
-he is using is not strongly hardened and is therefore well
-suited for bromoil printing, he may undertake development
-with any one of the ordinary developers which he
-prefers.</i></p>
-
-<p>The developers, which do not exercise a hardening
-influence on the gelatine, are the iron developer and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_18"></a>[18]</span>
-amidol (diamidophenol hydrochloride). As the iron developer
-is not really suited to this purpose on account of
-certain unpleasant qualities inherent in it, it is advisable
-to use amidol for the development of bromide paper for
-bromoil printing whenever possible, and the best developer
-is composed as follows:</p>
-
-<table>
- <tr>
- <td>Amidol</td>
- <td class="tdr">1.7</td>
- <td>g</td>
- <td class="tdr">12.3</td>
- <td>gr.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td>Sodium sulphite, dry</td>
- <td class="tdr">10</td>
- <td>g</td>
- <td class="tdr">77</td>
- <td>gr.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td>Water</td>
- <td class="tdr">1000</td>
- <td>ccm</td>
- <td class="tdr">16</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-<p>The sodium sulphite is first dissolved in water, and
-the easiest way is to pour the necessary quantity of
-water into a developing dish and sprinkle the pulverized
-or granular dry sodium sulphite into it while the dish
-is constantly rocked; solution takes place almost instantly
-under these conditions. Larger lumps, which
-would stick to the bottom of the dish, must be immediately
-stirred up. As soon as the sodium sulphite is
-dissolved, the amidol should be added and this will also
-dissolve immediately. The addition should be made in
-the order described, for, if the amidol is dissolved first,
-the solution is often turbid. If dry sodium sulphite
-is not available, double the quantity of crystallized
-sulphite may be used.</p>
-
-<p>The amidol developer should be freshly prepared each
-time that it is used, as it does not keep in solution.
-The measurement of the quantities of amidol and sulphite
-given above does not need to be made with the
-most painstaking care, as small variations in the quantities
-are unimportant.</p>
-
-<p>In using amidol developer the greatest care must be
-taken to avoid allowing amidol powder, in even the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_19"></a>[19]</span>
-smallest quantity, to come into contact with the bleached
-print ready for bromoil printing. Even the finest particles
-of amidol, although invisible to the naked eye,
-will produce yellowish brown spots on the gelatine which
-penetrate through the film and into the paper itself.
-These dots and spots, especially if, as is usual, they occur
-in large numbers, will make the print completely useless,
-and it is impossible to remove them.</p>
-
-<p>If amidol developer is not available, <i>any other developer
-which is desired</i> may be used. As we have
-already stated, however, certain possibilities of failure
-are to be anticipated, but will not necessarily occur.</p>
-
-<p><i>Every effort should be made to produce a bromide
-print as perfect as possible, with clean high lights.</i></p>
-
-<p>The best bromide prints or enlargements for bromoil
-printing are those which are <i>correctly exposed, but are
-not developed out to the greatest possible density</i>. A
-print which is thus fully developed is very satisfactory
-as a bromide but offers certain difficulties in bromoil
-printing, which will be described later. <i>Therefore the
-development should be stopped as soon as the lights show
-full detail without any fog, but before the shadows have
-reached full density.</i> The deepest shadows should then
-be of a deep greyish black, but should not be clogged
-up. When a bromide print is properly exposed, there
-is sufficient time between the appearance of the details
-in the lights and the attainment of the deepest possible
-black in the shadows to easily select the proper moment
-for cessation of development. It is, however, desirable
-not to go beyond this stage of development, for the
-reason that <i>a very dense silver deposit distributed completely
-through the gelatine emulsion to the paper support
-is not easily bleached out</i>. When this difficulty<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_20"></a>[20]</span>
-occurs, the bleaching solution is generally, but incorrectly,
-blamed for it. If, in spite of this difficulty,
-complete bleaching is attained, the shadows of the
-image usually retain a yellowish color which cannot be
-removed by the baths which follow the bleaching. If
-it is intended to ink up the whole surface of such a
-print, this discoloration of the shadows is not important,
-for it will be completely covered by the ink. But
-if the print is to be treated in a sketchy manner, and
-some parts of its surface are not to be inked, this cannot
-be successfully done on account of the yellowish
-coloring of the shadows.</p>
-
-<p><i>Underexposure</i> must be carefully avoided, for details
-which are not present in the bromide print will, of
-course, not appear in the bromoil print.</p>
-
-<p><i>Overexposure</i> will occasionally give usable results, if
-the development of the overexposed print is stopped at
-the proper point. In such cases, we must usually expect
-some deposit in the high lights and consequently
-a certain fogging of the image, though this can often
-be overcome, at least partly, by swelling the print at
-a higher temperature. Perfect prints cannot be expected,
-if the basic print is lacking in quality. If the
-overexposure is not too great, the print can be improved
-to a certain extent by clearing it in very dilute Farmer’s
-reducer. Treatment with this reducer has no deleterious
-effect on the later processes. The Farmer’s reducer
-should only be used for a slight clearing up of too dark
-parts of the bromide print; for this purpose the parts
-of the moist print which are to be reduced should be gone
-over with a brush dipped in very dilute reducer and
-immediately plunged into plenty of water, to avoid any
-spreading of the reducer into other parts of the image.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_21"></a>[21]</span></p>
-
-<p><i>Developing fog</i> should naturally be avoided as much
-as possible. Fogging of the bromide print is caused by
-the formation of a more or less dense silver precipitate
-without any relation to the image over the whole surface
-of the print. As the bleacher takes effect wherever
-metallic silver is present in the film, the result in such
-cases is a general tanning of the film, which is detrimental
-to the production of the necessary differences
-in swelling power in the gelatine. The tanned gelatine
-image is then also fogged.</p>
-
-<p><i>Consequently the best results may be obtained from
-very brilliant, but not excessively developed, bromide
-prints.</i></p>
-
-<p>We must also <i>avoid falling into the opposite extreme
-in the development of the bromide print, by getting
-too thin prints lacking in contrast</i>. In prints which are
-too thin, only a very small quantity of metallic silver
-has been reduced in the development, and this lies wholly
-on the surface of the film. Such prints usually show
-full detail, but the contrasts between the lights and the
-shadows are too small. Since the tanning produced by
-the later bleaching occurs because of the presence of
-metallic silver in the film, and since its intensity depends
-on the quantity of this silver, we cannot obtain
-the necessary difference in swelling power by bleaching
-the film of prints which are too thin because of insufficient
-development. The result is a weak tanned image
-in the gelatine film; bromoil prints thus produced can
-consequently only exhibit a very short scale of tone
-values, and this cannot be essentially lengthened by
-the use of the bromoil process alone. Such bromide
-prints may find a special application in combination
-transfers, which will be described later. It is also possible,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_22"></a>[22]</span>
-under certain circumstances, to use incomplete
-development as a method for producing soft bromoil
-prints from contrasty negatives.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Control of the Silver Bromide Print.</span>—Although
-in bromoil printing the most various renderings can be
-obtained from a perfect bromide print, by variation of
-the temperature of swelling and by proper handling of
-the inking, it is also possible, under some circumstances,
-to vary the final result by proper treatment during the
-making of the bromide print, especially when we are
-not dealing with normal negatives. If, for instance,
-we have to deal with a very thin negative, it is possible
-that even the extreme possibilities offered by the
-bromoil process are not sufficient to insure the attainment
-of the desired modulation, for, as will later appear,
-the possibility of increasing the difference in
-swelling in the film is limited by the limited resisting
-power of the gelatine. In such cases, we must take
-advantage of the accumulation of all possible aids and
-therefore, in making the bromide print, do all that is
-possible in order to bring out desired objects, which are
-only indicated in the negative and do not show sufficient
-detail.</p>
-
-<p><i>Therefore, if we desire to increase the contrast of the
-negative in the final print</i>, we should use a harder working
-paper and add potassium bromide to the developer.</p>
-
-<p><i>If we desire to get soft prints from a contrasty negative</i>,
-we may use different methods. The simplest way
-is the use of a very rapid and consequently soft working
-paper. Ordinarily, however, this method is not sufficiently
-helpful. We must therefore also use suitable
-methods in later steps of the process, such as making
-the difference in swelling in the gelatine layer as small<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_23"></a>[23]</span>
-as possible in order to bring down the contrast, or inking
-up with soft inks.</p>
-
-<p>A very reliable process for the production of soft
-prints or enlargements, even from contrasty negatives,
-is the following: the proper exposure for the densest
-portions of the negative should be first determined by
-means of a trial strip; then a full sized sheet of paper
-is exposed for exactly the time which has been determined,
-soaked in water until it is perfectly limp, and
-then placed in the developer. As soon as the first outlines
-of the image appear, the print is placed in a dish
-of pure water and allowed to lie there, film down. As
-soon as development has ceased, the print is taken out
-of water, dipped into the developer for an instant, and
-then immediately put back into the water. This method
-requires considerable time for full development, but produces
-prints or enlargements of especial softness. In
-this process, the developer which is absorbed by the film
-is soon exhausted in reducing the heavy deposit in the
-shadows, so that their development ceases, while enough
-developer still remains unexhausted in the other portions
-of the image to keep on developing. With very
-dense negatives, developer warmed to 25° C. (77° F.)
-can be used for the production of soft prints, but it
-must be very much diluted and carefully used, for development
-proceeds very quickly. Very soft prints may
-also be obtained by bathing the exposed bromide prints
-for about two minutes in a one per cent solution of
-potassium bichromate before development. This solution
-is thoroughly washed out of the print, and it is then
-developed.</p>
-
-<p>Yet with very hard negatives all these remedies frequently
-fail, because the high lights are almost completely<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_24"></a>[24]</span>
-opaque to light because of their density. In
-such cases the negative itself must be improved. The
-ammonium persulphate reducer usually recommended for
-such plates, which acts more strongly on the lights than
-on the shadows, is, however, too uncertain in its action
-and may imperil the negative. It is better to adopt
-<i>Eder’s chlorizing method</i>, which enables one to improve
-too contrasty negatives in a convenient and certain
-manner. The principle of this process is as follows:
-the metallic silver of the negative is converted into
-silver chloride, which is again developed. This redevelopment
-is accomplished in such a way that the
-silver chloride on the surface of the film is first reduced
-to metallic silver; if development is continued, the reduction
-is continued to the bottom of the film. The
-delicate details, lying on the surface of the film, are
-thus first developed, while development of the overdense
-high lights, in which the silver deposit extends
-right through to the glass, is finished only after some
-time. It is therefore possible to stop development at
-the instant at which the shadows and half-tones are completely
-redeveloped, while the overdense high lights are,
-for instance, only half developed, and therefore only
-half consist of metallic silver, the lower half being still
-silver chloride. If the development is interrupted at
-this stage and the negative placed in a fixing bath, the
-still undeveloped silver chloride is dissolved. The
-shadows and half-tones thus retain their original values,
-and only the overdense deposits in the shadows are reduced.
-If the development is not stopped at this stage,
-but is carried through to completion, the negative is
-obtained unaltered, and the process can be repeated.
-If the second development is stopped too soon, the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_25"></a>[25]</span>
-negative may be endangered and a very thin negative,
-lacking in contrasts, obtained.</p>
-
-<p>The practical application of the chlorizing process is
-effected by bleaching the negative in the following
-solution:</p>
-
-<table>
- <tr>
- <td>Cupric sulphate</td>
- <td class="tdr">100</td>
- <td>g</td>
- <td class="tdr">1</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td>Common salt</td>
- <td class="tdr">200</td>
- <td>g</td>
- <td class="tdr">2</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td>Water</td>
- <td class="tdr">1000</td>
- <td>ccm</td>
- <td class="tdr">10</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-<p>As soon as the negative is completely bleached, which
-should be judged not only by transmitted light but
-also by examination from the glass side, it should be well
-washed and immersed in a slow-acting developer. All
-these processes can be carried out in daylight, and the
-second development of the negative is best controlled
-by frequent examination of the glass side. Development
-should be stopped when the shadows and half-tones
-are blackened, and there is still a whitish film of
-silver chloride in the high lights. Observation of the
-negative by looking through it is not advisable, for the
-negative very soon appears dense by transmitted light,
-because the metallic silver formed in development masks
-the silver chloride. As soon as the development is considered
-to have gone far enough, the plate should be
-rinsed and then fixed and washed in the usual manner.
-After a few trials, the judgment of the correct stage at
-which to stop development presents no difficulty.</p>
-
-<p>I ordinarily use the chlorizing process in the following
-way, which practically excludes any possibility of
-failure: the negative is completely bleached in the
-solution just mentioned, and then washed for five
-minutes. It is then developed in any desired developer
-until it shows by transmitted light practically the same<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_26"></a>[26]</span>
-density, though in a brownish color, as it had before
-chlorizing. It is then rinsed off, placed in a solution
-of hypo, <i>not stronger than two per cent</i>, and carefully
-watched by light passing through the plate; it is taken
-out as soon as the desired stage is reached, well washed,
-and dried. In this modification of the chlorizing
-process the condition of the plate can be observed at
-every stage. The final negative, to be sure, does not
-consist of pure metallic silver, but as a rule of a combination
-of silver and silver chloride; but such negatives
-are sufficiently permanent for making prints and
-enlargements on bromide paper.</p>
-
-<p>It is also advisable to lessen the harsh contrasts in a
-normal negative, either by masking the more transparent
-parts on the glass side, or by holding them back in
-printing or enlarging. Briefly, every possible means
-should be employed in order to obtain as good and
-harmonious a bromide print as possible.</p>
-
-<p><i>The beginner is strongly recommended, however, in
-his first trials with bromoil, to start as far as possible
-with normal negatives and correct, and especially very
-clean, bromide prints.</i> The use of this process for the
-improvement of the results from difficult negatives
-should be left for more expert workers.</p>
-
-<p>It is often desired to provide landscapes with clouds,
-and this can be easily attained if enlargements are used
-as the basis for bromoil prints. Acceptable results are
-given by a process, which has often been recommended.
-This is, after blocking out the sky on the negative, to
-enlarge the landscape, develop the print and again place
-it while still wet on the enlarging screen and expose
-for the clouds, disregarding the existing image, and then
-develop the clouds.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_27"></a>[27]</span></p>
-
-<p>I might describe here another process for obtaining
-clouds, because it is especially suitable for the bromoil
-process. If there is no object in the negative which is
-cut by the upper edge of the plate, it is extremely easy
-to introduce clouds into such a landscape, and at the
-same time lengthen out the picture at the top. A cloud
-negative suitable for the landscape is chosen, and the
-relative exposures for the landscape and clouds found as
-accurately as possible by test strips. The landscape
-negative is then focused on the enlarging screen so that
-there is plenty of paper above the upper edge of the
-plate, and then the exposure is made while the upper
-part of the paper is covered with a card, which is kept
-moving constantly between the light source and the
-enlarging screen, so that the upper edge of the plate is
-not imaged on the screen. After the exposure is finished,
-the paper is shifted down on the screen until the upper
-edge of the paper comes at the place which was previously
-occupied by the edge of the plate, the landscape
-negative is changed for the cloud negative, and the
-clouds are exposed on the upper and hitherto unexposed
-part of the enlarging paper, while the landscape is protected
-from exposure by means of a piece of card, shaped
-like the previous one for the sky, and continually moved
-to avoid a sharp line of separation. In the subsequent
-development a perfectly uniform picture is obtained,
-in which there should be no visible trace of its compound
-nature.</p>
-
-<p>Obviously, in the preparation of the bromoil print,
-it is advisable to employ to the utmost the many possibilities
-which bromide printing offers. Thus too thin
-parts of a negative may be held back by proper blocking
-out on the back and numerous other possible modifications,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_28"></a>[28]</span>
-which have been described in textbooks and
-technical journals, but which cannot be further dealt
-with here, may be profitably employed.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Fixation.</span>—<i>The developed bromide print should be
-well rinsed and fixed in the usual way.</i> If the rinsing
-is omitted or is too superficial, complete or partial
-reduction phenomena may occur in the fixing bath, and
-make the print unusable.</p>
-
-<p>The bromide print should be left in the hypo solution
-for about 10 minutes, and care should be taken, if
-several prints are simultaneously treated, that they do
-not stick to one another. Then should follow thorough
-washing for removal of the hypo; if traces of hypo remain
-in the film, the subsequent bleaching is rendered
-more difficult, as the image does not disappear but only
-turns brownish. While it is feasible to subject the
-bromide print to the bleaching process, as soon as it
-comes from the washing, <i>an intermediate drying is an
-advantage</i>; for the gelatine gains greater resistance by
-this drying.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_29"></a>[29]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II<br />
-<span class="smaller">THE REMOVAL OF THE SILVER IMAGE</span></h2>
-
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Bleaching.</span>—The bleaching process has the purpose
-of making the bromide print, correctly prepared
-according to the previously described method,
-suitable for the bromoil process. To this end the silver
-image must be made to disappear and in its place that
-condition of the gelatine produced which renders it possible
-for it to take up the greasy ink. <i>The bleaching
-solution has, therefore, two functions: it must remove
-the metallic silver, imbedded in the gelatine film, which
-forms the bromide image, and at the same time cause
-a tanning of the gelatine film corresponding to the image
-that disappears. In the place of the silver image there
-then exists an invisible tanned image in the gelatine film.</i></p>
-
-<p>There are a large number of chemical compounds
-known to photographic technique, which enable us to
-dissolve out the metallic silver imbedded in the gelatine
-film. Such are, for example, the many reducers which
-have found practical application. Many of these chemicals
-also cause changes in the gelatine simultaneously
-with the solution of the silver. But not one of the
-hitherto known bleaching solutions possesses the double
-power required of it: solution of the silver image and
-corresponding tanning of the film. Some produce too
-great a tanning which acts upon the whole film, and the
-result in inking-up is muddy flat prints, which do not
-lend themselves to artistic modification. With other<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_30"></a>[30]</span>
-bleaching solutions a differential tanning of the gelatine
-is produced, but at the same time they so alter the
-surface of the gelatine that it becomes glossy all over,
-and only takes even soft inks with difficulty.</p>
-
-<p>My experiments have led to the compounding of a
-bleach which completely fulfils the requirements set for
-it; the silver image is quickly and completely removed,
-while simultaneously a tanning of the film, strictly
-analogous to the disappearing image, is effected; easier
-and more certain inking-up is rendered possible, and
-besides this the advantage is obtained that the differences
-of relief, produced in the gelatine by the bleaching
-process, can be influenced to a wide degree by varying
-the temperature of the water. The composition of this
-bleaching solution, which prepares the gelatine film in
-the most perfect manner for the bromoil print, is as
-follows, three stock solutions being required:</p>
-
-<table>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">I.</td>
- <td>Cupric sulphate</td>
- <td class="tdr">200</td>
- <td>g</td>
- <td class="tdr">2</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr"></td>
- <td>Water</td>
- <td class="tdr">1000</td>
- <td>ccm</td>
- <td class="tdr">10</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">II.</td>
- <td>Potassium bromide</td>
- <td class="tdr">200</td>
- <td>g</td>
- <td class="tdr">2</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr"></td>
- <td>Water</td>
- <td class="tdr">1000</td>
- <td>ccm</td>
- <td class="tdr">10</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">III.</td>
- <td colspan="5">Cold saturated solution of potassium bichromate.</td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-<p>A concentrated bleach is made by mixing:</p>
-
-<table>
- <tr>
- <td>Solution I.</td>
- <td>3 parts</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td>Solution II.</td>
- <td>3 parts</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td>Solution III.</td>
- <td>1 part</td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-<p>To every 100 ccm of this mixture should be added 10
-drops of pure hydrochloric acid (10 drops to 3½ oz.).
-This concentrated bleach will keep indefinitely and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_31"></a>[31]</span>
-should be diluted before use with three to four times its
-volume of water. The use of a more concentrated solution
-is not advisable, as irregularities frequently occur
-in consequence of too rapid bleaching, especially towards
-the margins of the prints.</p>
-
-<p>The color of the concentrated bleach is green, or when
-diluted, yellowish; the solution must be absolutely clear.
-When the stock solutions are mixed there is usually
-some cloudiness, but this is cleared up by the hydrochloric
-acid. By standing for a long time at low temperatures
-a precipitate is sometimes formed, but this is
-of no moment. The compounding of this bleach should
-be made with the greatest accuracy. Inaccuracies or
-modifications in its composition are serious, because although
-the solution does not lose in bleaching power,
-yet the invisible tanning action is then often not completed
-in the desired manner. Too great an addition
-of hydrochloric acid for example, accelerates the process
-of bleaching, but the inking-up of prints thus bleached
-is frequently difficult. If the bleaching of the shadows
-of the bromide prints goes on slowly, the reason as a
-rule lies in the fact that the prints were overdeveloped
-and have an excessively dense silver deposit.</p>
-
-<p>The bromide prints should be immersed in this bleaching
-solution, after previous soaking in cold water. If
-they have been correctly made, the image rapidly grows
-weaker and after a few minutes its greyish-black color
-changes into a pale citron yellow. If the bromide print
-was developed too far, the bleaching takes rather longer,
-as the shadows, developed right through to the base,
-require a lengthy period for solution. If several prints
-are to be bleached at once, the best procedure is to
-place one print in the solution and turn it film side<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_32"></a>[32]</span>
-down when the first traces of bleaching are noticeable.
-Then the next print should be immersed with the film
-up and by thus proceeding gradually it is possible to
-bleach a large number of sheets simultaneously in the
-one dish. Continual movement will prevent the formation
-of air bells. If air bells adhere to the film, they
-protect those places from the action of the bleach and
-dark points or spots of unchanged metallic silver remain,
-the subsequent bleaching of which naturally prolongs
-the process. The same applies to prints which
-lie on top of one another.</p>
-
-<p>With too slow bleaching, the hydrochloric acid may
-be gradually increased, <i>at the most</i> to double that prescribed;
-one should not hasten the bleaching process
-by warming the solution. The bleaching is rapidly
-effected in warm solutions; yet generally the film of
-moderately hardened papers is so altered that they
-swell up too much even in cold water and take the ink
-badly or not at all. The dilute bleaching solution will
-keep and may be used repeatedly as long as it acts;
-when it becomes exhausted, the slowing up of the bleaching
-cannot be hastened by the addition of hydrochloric
-acid. The chemical reactions in the bleaching bath are,
-according to Dr. P. R. von Schrott, as follows:</p>
-
-<p class="center">2CuBr₂ + Ag₂ = 2AgBr + Cu₂Br₂</p>
-
-<p>The cuprous bromide, Cu₂Br₂, which is formed, reduces
-the bichromate as follows:</p>
-
-<p class="center">3Cu₂Br₂ + 6CrO₃ = 3CuBr₂ + 3CuCrO₄ + Cr₂O₃.CrO₃</p>
-
-<p><i>It sometimes happens that bromide prints, in spite of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_33"></a>[33]</span>
-long immersion in the bleaching solution, apparently
-will not bleach and only change their color to brown.</i></p>
-
-<p>The reason for this usually unimportant phenomenon
-is, as a rule, that such prints have not been sufficiently
-washed and still contain hypo.</p>
-
-<p>It may also happen that prints which have lain on
-top of each other in washing are badly washed in parts;
-then the image bleaches, <i>but the film shows dark patches
-or streaks at those places which still contain hypo</i>.
-Such apparently unbleached prints should be left for
-about 10 minutes in the bleaching solution; <i>the disturbing
-coloration, whether of the whole picture or only
-of parts, disappears completely in the subsequent baths</i>,
-even when the image had apparently remained at full
-strength.</p>
-
-<p>If such a print, apparently not bleached or spotty, is
-immersed in the sulphuric acid bath mentioned below,
-the discoloration of the film is quickly removed by its
-action; the print then often passes through a phase in
-which it appears to be a negative, the secondary image
-becoming visible on the yellow ground, and then bleaches
-out completely. With such prints it may also happen
-that it is only noticed after removal of the stain that
-unbleached traces of the silver image still remain. Then
-the bleaching must be repeated.</p>
-
-<p>If the color of the bromide print only changes to
-brown even after protracted immersion in the bleaching
-solution, otherwise retaining full gradation, and remaining
-unchanged even in the sulphuric acid bath, though
-it bleaches out in the hypo, the print cannot be inked.
-The reason for this difficulty is improper composition
-of the bleaching solution, or occasionally improper development
-and fixation of the bromide print. It may<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_34"></a>[34]</span>
-also be due to excessive use of the bleaching solution;
-3 to 4 ccm (50 to 70 minims) of concentrated bleaching
-solution should be allowed for every 13 by 18 cm (5 by
-7) print.</p>
-
-<p>Obviously all these processes may be carried out by
-diffused daylight. The bleached-out prints should be
-repeatedly washed, until the drainings are quite clear,
-and should then be immersed in the following bath:</p>
-
-<table>
- <tr>
- <td>Sulphuric acid, pure</td>
- <td class="tdr">10</td>
- <td>ccm</td>
- <td class="tdr">77</td>
- <td>min.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td>Water</td>
- <td class="tdr">1000</td>
- <td>ccm</td>
- <td class="tdr">16</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-<p><i>In this bath any remaining color disappears quickly and
-completely</i>, and prints, which have apparently wholly
-or partially resisted bleaching, are also very rapidly
-decolorized in this bath. Any spots and streaks also
-disappear. If, however, there is anything left, then the
-bleaching was not complete, and unreduced metallic
-silver remains in the film. <i>After the sulphuric acid
-bath the prints should show the pure color of the paper
-base; the film side ought to be hardly different from
-the back in color.</i> With prints that have been overdeveloped,
-a certain slight variation of color remains in
-the film, which, however, in no wise prejudices the
-inking-up. If there are still some spots, they are usually
-due to a slight precipitate lying on the surface of the
-film, which can be easily swabbed off. When this point
-of colorlessness is reached, and it usually requires only
-a few minutes, it is useless to leave the prints longer
-in the acid bath. They should be washed in repeated
-changes of water and immersed in the following fixing
-bath:</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_35"></a>[35]</span></p>
-
-<table>
- <tr>
- <td>Hypo</td>
- <td class="tdr">100</td>
- <td>g</td>
- <td class="tdr">1</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td>Water</td>
- <td class="tdr">1000</td>
- <td>ccm</td>
- <td class="tdr">10</td>
- <td>oz.</td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-<p>The use of this fixing bath is essential and is based
-on the following considerations. During the bleaching
-process a secondary silver bromide image is formed in
-the gelatine film. This secondary image is not visible
-on white and yellowish bromide papers, because it is
-whitish-grey. If a bleached print, which has not been
-fixed, is exposed for a long time to daylight a distinctly
-visible blue-grey image is formed, which naturally is
-troublesome in the further operations. This secondary
-image of silver bromide is completely removed, however,
-by the fixing bath.</p>
-
-<p>The ordinary acid fixing baths can also be used without
-disadvantage for fixing. If the sulphuric acid is
-not sufficiently washed out, decomposition of the fixing
-bath may ensue, which will be made apparent by the
-unpleasant smell, and which is prejudicial to the action
-of the bath. Care should be taken that the prints do
-not stick to one another in the fixing bath and that
-they are thoroughly fixed out, as the secondary bromide
-image that is not removed will make its appearance
-in insufficiently fixed places and may cause darker
-patches.</p>
-
-<p>Washing then completes the preliminary preparation
-of the prints.</p>
-
-<p>For the sake of completeness it should be mentioned
-that the prints may be immersed in the bleaching solution
-in the darkroom after the first development, and
-can be fixed after the solution of the silver image. This
-shortened process is, however, uncertain and can not
-be recommended.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_36"></a>[36]</span></p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Intermediate Drying.</span>—<i>After the bleaching
-process outlined in the previous section the print must
-be dried without fail.</i> While drying after the development
-and fixation of the bromide print is advisable but
-not absolutely necessary, <i>the intermediate drying after
-bleaching is of the greatest importance</i>. It is possible
-that the later operations may be successful in spite of
-neglect of this recommendation. As a rule, however,
-various mishaps occur when the intermediate drying is
-omitted. In many cases the ink can only be caused
-to adhere with difficulty, in others, not at all; sometimes
-the inking will proceed up to a certain point and then
-suddenly completely stop. Sometimes the image appears
-as a negative, that is to say, the ink is taken up by the
-high lights and rejected by the shadows. All these
-failures will be obviated by the intermediate drying at
-this stage. Whether this intermediate drying takes place
-rapidly or slowly is practically immaterial; naturally it
-ought not to be so prolonged that the gelatine suffers.</p>
-
-<p>The prints thus prepared can either be again soaked
-in water and immediately worked up, <i>or kept and treated
-at any time</i>. It is very convenient, especially for an
-amateur, to have a stock of such ready prepared and
-dry prints, because he is then in a position to work
-when he finds time and opportunity. The prints, prepared
-and dried as has been described, will keep indefinitely.
-With correct treatment there can be seen
-on the gelatine film of the dry print scarcely a trace of
-the bleached-out image; only in the very deepest
-shadows a slight coloration of the film, tending to grey,
-can sometimes be noticed. It is advisable, therefore,
-to mark the print on the paper side before bleaching, as
-otherwise it is subsequently difficult to distinguish this.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_37"></a>[37]</span></p>
-
-<p>Before we go any further, the whole preliminary
-process is summarized once more:</p>
-
-<ul>
-<li>Development,</li>
-<li>Fixation,</li>
-<li>Washing,</li>
-<li>Bleaching,</li>
-<li>Short washing,</li>
-<li>Sulphuric acid bath,</li>
-<li>Short washing,</li>
-<li>Fixation,</li>
-<li>Washing,</li>
-<li>Intermediate drying.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_38"></a>[38]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III<br />
-<span class="smaller">THE INKING-UP</span></h2>
-
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Production of the Differential Swelling.</span>—In
-the chapter on the bleaching we fully explained
-the processes which take place in the gelatine
-film under the action of the bleaching solution, and that
-the most important result of the bleaching process, aside
-from the disappearance of the silver image, is the formation
-of different degrees of swelling corresponding to
-the primary image, which in their totality form the
-tanned image produced in place of the photochemical
-image by the bleaching.</p>
-
-<p><i>For the success of the bromoil print, it is now of the
-utmost importance that the different capabilities of
-swelling, now latent in the gelatine film</i>, should be satisfactorily
-utilized. It is obviously possible to produce
-this swelling in very different degrees. The colder the
-water used for the swelling, the smaller the difference
-between the lights and shadows, while the warmer the
-water the more this difference is accentuated. If, for
-example, a print prepared for the bromoil process is
-placed in <i>cold water</i> and allowed to swell for some
-minutes, the existing capacity for swelling will only be
-excited to a slight degree. The high lights of the invisible
-image only take up a little water, and when dry
-are differentiated from the shadows under oblique visual
-examination by a very delicate gloss or not at all. If<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_39"></a>[39]</span>
-this picture is now worked-up with greasy ink, a print
-is obtained with <i>a short scale of gradation, and its tone
-values are usually less satisfactory than those of the
-original bromide print</i>. If, on the other hand, the print
-is placed in <i>very warm water</i>, the swelling of the gelatine
-reaches a maximum. The high lights are very
-much swollen, even the half-tones are somewhat raised,
-and the shadows, which do not absorb water, appear
-sunken. The result of the swelling in such warm water
-in this case is the formation of a very pronounced relief,
-that is not only visible, but is almost perceptible to the
-touch. If such a picture is inked up, a bromoil print
-is obtained, <i>the contrasts of which are much stronger
-than those of the original bromide print</i>. Between these
-two extremes there is obviously a whole series of intermediate
-stages, the suitable employment of which
-permits of the most varied gradations.</p>
-
-<p>As already mentioned, the capacity for swelling of
-the different makes of bromide papers is not the same
-in baths of the same temperature. This fact, however,
-argues neither for nor against the usefulness of the
-various bromide papers. It makes necessary, to be sure,
-a certain care in the use of a paper, the qualities of
-which are unknown. If one has to deal with such a
-paper, the prepared print should first be soaked in quite
-cold water; it should then be removed from the water,
-placed on a support, dried in the manner to be later
-described, and examined by oblique illumination as to
-whether the high lights show by a slight gloss that they
-have absorbed water. This will be the case if the image
-shows well swollen high lights; if they are not present,
-it will hardly be possible to find distinctly glossy places.
-In any case one may begin with the inking-up, prepared,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_40"></a>[40]</span>
-as will be explained later, to increase the swelling if
-necessary during the inking-up by immersion in warm
-water. If on the other hand, the print, when taken
-from the cold water, distinctly shows places where differences
-of swelling are shown by a gloss or even a
-delicate relief in the film, the work may be proceeded
-with, without further trouble.</p>
-
-<p>Under any circumstance one should be careful at first
-in the production of the differential swelling. <i>There
-should rather be no relief than too pronounced a one</i>;
-for differences of swelling that are too small can be
-easily and satisfactorily increased during the work; on
-the other hand it is scarcely possible again to reduce
-too strong a relief. While learning, or when using an
-unfamiliar brand of paper, it is therefore advisable to
-allow the sheet to swell first in cold water and to carefully
-begin the inking-up. Only if this is not satisfactory,
-should a warmer bath be used and the inking
-again tried. This method is, however, dealt with more
-fully in the section of Chapter III, entitled “Different
-Methods of Working” (<a href="#Page_85">page 85</a>).</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Properties of the Relief and its Influence
-on the Character of the Picture.</span>—In order that
-the following explanations may be understood, an important
-property of the prepared and dried gelatine film
-must be mentioned.</p>
-
-<p>The film of the prepared print, in which the differences
-of swelling necessary for the formation of the bromoil
-print are latent, develops variations of relief when it
-is placed in water. Then the untanned high lights absorb
-water, as already described, while the hardened
-shadows do not absorb it. The result of this process
-is the formation of those swellings, which, when they<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_41"></a>[41]</span>
-have attained a certain degree, are characterized by the
-formation of a relief.</p>
-
-<p>A definite degree of swelling corresponds to a definite
-temperature of water. This swelling disappears again
-if the film is dried. <i>The gelatine has, however, acquired
-the property of again attaining the same degree of swelling
-when immersed in water at any time after drying,
-even if the temperature of this water be a good deal
-lower.</i> A print, for example, on which a certain relief
-has been produced in water at 35° C. (95° F.) and
-which has given up this water again because of drying,
-again attains the same relief if immersed in ordinary
-tap water at 10° C. (50° F.). If, however, this print
-after drying is immersed in water at 40° C. (104° F.),
-that is in hotter water than that first used, a still higher
-relief is obtained, and again in a similar manner, after
-drying, it will attain this higher relief when immersed
-in water at any lower temperature.</p>
-
-<p><i>The degree of swelling that is once attained can, therefore,
-so far as the resistance of the gelatine film will
-permit, be increased, but it cannot be reduced</i>, if the
-print as a whole is not subjected to a tanning, as with
-formaldehyde, a process that is not easily controllable.
-This peculiarity of gelatine makes it necessary to go to
-work carefully in the formation of the relief, so as not
-to carry the latter too far. If the work is begun on a
-too low relief this can be easily increased to the necessary
-height, as will be shown later, absolutely without
-any regard to any inking up that may have been done.
-<i>On the other hand, if the formation of the relief has
-once been carried too far, as a rule the print can not
-be used</i>, although reduction of the excessive swelling by
-a tanning agent may be attempted.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_42"></a>[42]</span></p>
-
-<p>The property of the gelatine film, just described,
-offers a further convenience for the bromoil worker; for
-he can bring the bleached and dried print to the necessary
-degree of relief in water of suitable temperature,
-and, if he does not wish to work it up at once, it can
-be dried and laid aside until needed. In working-up
-such prints he is then, as a rule, relieved of the necessity
-of obtaining warm water.</p>
-
-<p><i>The question how far the swelling of the film has to
-go or in other words what kind of a relief should exist,
-if any</i>, in order to obtain a harmoniously graduated
-bromoil print, is extremely difficult to answer. A few
-practical trials quickly give the ability to judge this
-correctly. If a well-modulated negative is used, one in
-which the differences of gradation between the high
-lights and the shadows are not too great, the swollen
-gelatine film after drying should show a very delicate
-but still noticeable relief; yet the high lights of the
-print should scarcely be raised above the shadows, and
-should not show too marked a gloss.</p>
-
-<p>The visibility of the relief is essentially determined
-by the character of the print. The more contrasty the
-bromide print was, the more easily are the different degrees
-of swelling made apparent by the formation of
-a visible relief. A picture with sharp outlines and great
-contrasts, such as an architectural study, easily gives a
-distinct relief visible in all its details. Pictures with
-softer gradation, as, for instance, delicate portraits, behave
-differently. One can not expect a striking relief
-in such prints. If this should be forced by warming
-the water, the bromoil print may easily attain an undesirable
-harshness. With portraits, one should therefore
-be satisfied when the outline of the profile against<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_43"></a>[43]</span>
-the background, the contours of the eyes and the mouth,
-are raised to a barely visible extent from the gelatine
-base. At the same time very dense parts, like a white
-collar, a lady’s light dress, lace, etc., may show a very
-distinct relief, even when the sharper lines of the face
-scarcely stand out in relief. Yet even in such cases
-the features can be recognized by the different gloss
-of the high lights and shadows under oblique observation.
-Naturally some attention must be paid here to the
-particular views of the operator. If strong contrasts
-are desired, greater differences of swelling must be used;
-if, on the other hand, softly modulated effects are sought,
-distinct relief must be avoided. In any case it is advisable
-not to attain this at once, but to get it as needed
-during the working-up by the use of water gradually
-increasing in temperature.</p>
-
-<p><i>It must be laid down as an axiom that the efficiency
-of a relief should never be judged by the eye alone, but
-should always be carefully tested out by inking-up with
-the brush.</i> The degree of swelling is correctly estimated
-at the first attempt when, in inking-up, the picture
-appears quite clearly after a little hopping, and this
-may happen if the character of the image is right, even
-though no relief could be seen.</p>
-
-<p><i>The stronger the relief formed by warming the water,
-the more contrasty the bromoil print will be.</i> Nevertheless
-there is a certain limit which should not be overstepped.
-If the print is warmed in the water bath so
-much that an excessive relief, which can almost be felt
-with the finger, is formed, in which deeply cut lines
-alternate with highly glazed places in relief, then the
-high lights are so saturated with water that under no
-circumstances will they take ink; even the softest inks<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_44"></a>[44]</span>
-will not adhere to them. Thus we obtain harsh highlights
-without details, while the deeply sunken shadows
-literally fill up with ink and become sooty. If the
-formation of the relief has been driven so far, it is not
-advisable to treat the print with ink.</p>
-
-<p>The forcing of the relief to the extreme possible limit
-is only justified when working with a flat negative, in
-order to obtain as rich a gradation as possible from a
-flat print. Also, this should not be done all at once
-before the commencement of the inking-up, but effected
-gradually during the work. Working in this
-way, extraordinarily successful results can be obtained
-and the contrast of the bromoil print can be made far
-more rich than that of the original bromide print. The
-limit lies only in the resisting power of the gelatine film
-and the flatter the bromide print was the sooner this
-is reached.</p>
-
-<p>The upper limit of temperature permissible for the
-water can hardly be defined; it depends entirely on
-the hardness of the gelatine film. It may happen that
-it is necessary gradually to go almost to the boiling
-point. Films that are hardened right through will withstand
-even boiling water without forming a relief.</p>
-
-<p>If, in warming the print, the melting point of the
-gelatine is approached, those parts which are but slightly
-tanned, such as the high lights, and especially any unexposed
-edges, begin to show a granular structure, and
-finally, when the heating is carried further, to melt.</p>
-
-<p><i>In the development of the relief great care should be
-taken that no part of the print remains dry</i>, and, if the
-film is placed face down, air bubbles should be avoided.
-If the print is placed face up in the dish, no part of it
-should project above the water, as it will then not absorb<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_45"></a>[45]</span>
-enough water; if the swelling has already taken
-place and a part of the film projects above the water
-(and this frequently happens, as the print, which at
-first lies on the bottom of the dish, after some time
-rises to the surface), the relief of the exposed parts
-goes down after some time, since the water evaporates
-from them into the air. Such insufficiently swollen parts,
-or those which have dried out, behave exactly as though
-they had been tanned more than the other parts of the
-surface. They have been able to absorb little or no
-water, or have lost the absorbed water by evaporation.
-They therefore take the ink, like the tanned shadows,
-far more readily than they would if they had retained
-the right amount of water, and far more ink adheres
-to them than should be the case and than adheres to
-the correctly swollen parts of the film. Thus patches
-of different form and size are formed at these places by
-the stronger adherence of the ink. Yet by renewed
-soaking of the print in the water these neglected places
-may be easily brought anew to the correct degree of
-swelling, and as far as concerns small spots caused by
-air bells, can be easily corrected. If larger patches of
-the film are insufficiently swollen, after the application
-of the ink they are usually much darker than the rest
-of the surface, and in such cases it is not always easy
-to obtain again the necessary evenness of the ink; it is
-then often necessary to ink up the whole print much
-more strongly than was originally planned, or to remove
-the whole film of ink.</p>
-
-<p>Besides the warm water bath there is also another
-means at our command to produce the differences of
-swelling. This is the use of <i>ammonia</i>. A. &amp; L. Lumière
-and Seyewetz, in a treatise published in 1913, on the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_46"></a>[46]</span>
-resistance of gelatine to alkalis, found that cold solutions
-of ammonia did not attack gelatine but caused it
-to swell more.</p>
-
-<p>If a bleached print is immersed in an aqueous one per
-cent solution of ammonia, the film attains in a very
-short time <i>the highest degree of swelling of which it is
-capable</i>, without the gelatine in the high lights being
-softened or damaged. The estimation of the height of
-the relief, which is so important for the successful carrying
-out of the inking, is scarcely possible with the ammonia
-bath, as it is extremely difficult to gauge its action.
-Therefore, it should only be used in those cases in which
-the highest swelling is absolutely necessary, as for instance,
-when using papers which have been strongly
-hardened in the manufacture, or with prints with very
-poor contrasts. A further application is with the transfer
-process, in which on the one hand it permits of the
-use of very soft inks and on the other hand enables
-one to keep the gelatine very resistant. Full details
-on the transfer of bromoil prints will be found in a later
-chapter. In very extreme cases, one may try to combine
-the action of the warm water and the ammonia
-bath, and use a warm ammonia bath. The ½ to 3 per
-cent solution of sodium carbonate recommended by E.
-Guttmann acts even more energetically than the ammonia
-solution.</p>
-
-<p>As is obvious from the foregoing remarks, it will be
-as well to work usually with water baths and leave the
-ammonia bath for a last resource, the more so as in the
-swelling of prints in this bath certain troublesome
-phenomena may appear, which do not occur when using
-the water baths. Sometimes the bleached image reappears
-in the ammonia bath in a brown color; sometimes<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_47"></a>[47]</span>
-small white spots appear on the prints which will
-not take the ink and which, as can be determined by
-examining them by transmitted light, also exist in the
-substance of the paper; finally the gelatine film sometimes
-swells all over, so that the ink is not taken up
-anywhere. Prints which are failures in consequence of
-the use of the ammonia bath, should be dried and can
-be again treated in a warm water bath.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Utensils.</span>—For the application of the ink the
-following are required:</p>
-
-<p><i>Brushes.</i>—A best quality oil-printing brush with very
-elastic hairs cut on the slant, the so-called stag’s-foot
-brush, should be used. To apply the ink, a brush should
-be used with a working surface of from 1½ to 2½ cm
-(⅝ to 1¼ in.) diameter; by diameter is meant the length
-of the longer axis of the elliptical surface produced by the
-slanting cut of the brush. For working-up very small
-surfaces or for placing accents of color, a brush of about
-½ cm (³⁄₁₆ in.) measurement should be used. In certain
-cases still smaller brushes may be useful. Such brushes
-are only used for working up details; they are only aids
-for special work. For the application of the ink generally,
-only the larger brushes should be used. It is far
-more difficult to apply the ink evenly with small brushes
-than with the larger ones, so that their use may cause
-needless discouragement.</p>
-
-<p>The application of the ink is effected by placing the
-whole working surface of the brush charged with ink
-on the print, and then slowly lifting it up; this results
-in a deposition of ink corresponding to the working
-surface of the brush used. The smaller the brush the
-more often it must be applied, and therefore, the greater
-the probability of irregular inking, especially in those<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_48"></a>[48]</span>
-parts where the brush marks overlap. Also small
-brushes are handled less conveniently than larger ones
-and smear easily. The first thing to do in inking a
-bromoil is to obtain a good, even, thin film over the
-whole surface, to get a general impression of the whole
-effect. Only then is one in a position to judge how the
-tone values should be varied. The use of too small a
-brush unduly protracts this first operation and makes it
-difficult.</p>
-
-<p>The brushes should be elastic but not too soft. Too
-soft brushes smear, that is to say, they deposit the ink
-in a thicker layer at their edges than in the middle and
-produce elliptical rings of ink, which must always be
-evened out by hopping.</p>
-
-<p>In determining the size of the brush, the size of the
-bromoil print must be taken into account. Generally
-it is easier to work with brushes of from 1½ to 2½ cm
-(⅝ to 1¼ in.) in diameter. For large sizes up to 30 ×
-40 cm (12 × 16 in.) brushes of even 4 or 5 cm (1½ or
-2 in.) may be used. Such brushes are not cheap, but
-are practically indestructible, if they are properly cleaned
-every time after use. The brushes are sold in tubular
-paper cases; these latter should be preserved and the
-brushes, after cleaning, put back into them, so that they
-are covered and the hairs do not get ruffled.</p>
-
-<p>In order to preserve the brushes and keep them in
-good working order, they must be cleaned as soon as
-the work is finished, otherwise the ink left in them sets
-and makes the hairs brittle.</p>
-
-<p>Brushes of long swine bristles with cut ends may also
-be used; with these especially, clean prints are quickly
-attained. They are superior to hair brushes of poor
-grade.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_49"></a>[49]</span></p>
-
-<p><i>The cleaning of the brushes</i> is best effected as follows:
-Pour into a deep dish a <i>readily volatile</i> fat solvent,
-such as benzol, trichlorethylene, carbon tetrachloride
-(carbona), etc.; but not turpentine, for if this be used
-the brushes cannot be used sometimes for days. Dip
-the brush into the liquid and press out the solvent on
-the edges of the dish, and stroke the brush vigorously
-on a piece of lintless linen, which should be used for
-this purpose only. The solvent can be used, ignoring
-the opacity which it soon assumes, as long as it will
-dissolve the ink. Only the hairs of the brush should
-be dipped in the solvent, but not the binding, as in some
-cases the cement with which they are fastened may be
-attacked.</p>
-
-<p><i>The Inks.</i>—Theoretically, any ink prepared with a
-fatty medium is suitable for bromoil printing. In order
-to give satisfactory results, the inks must satisfy two
-conditions: they must have the correct consistency and
-their medium must be soluble in benzol. As regards
-the consistency of the ink it should be noted that the
-prepared film in its swollen condition, that is when the
-lights are saturated with water, absolutely repels greasy
-inks only when this swelling attains the highest possible
-degree; a case which one seldom needs and which will
-usually have to be avoided. If this swelling is not
-carried to the limit, the high lights, in spite of the water
-they hold, will take up the greasy ink, yet usually only
-when the ink is very soft. <i>The swollen high lights thus
-repel ink of thicker consistency, while they take the
-softer inks more easily in proportion as they become
-thinner.</i> That the tanned shadows also take hard ink
-is natural, for they do not contain, or contain only
-to a very small extent, the water which repels the ink.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_50"></a>[50]</span>
-From these considerations it follows that in many
-cases satisfactory results cannot be obtained by using
-ink of only one consistency.</p>
-
-<p><i>The hard or heavy ink</i> should have about the consistency
-of table butter, and it should be possible to
-spread it into an even smooth film on a glass plate
-with light pressure. <i>The soft or light ink</i> should have
-about the thickness of honey and should spread under
-the knife without noticeable pressure.</p>
-
-<p><i>Collotype or copper-plate printing inks</i> of various
-makes are frequently usable. As a rule, however, they
-must be tested as to their usefulness for our process;
-their consistency is frequently too hard, and sometimes
-they are not taken up by the film or cannot be distributed
-well, even when they are considerable diluted
-with linseed oil varnish, in spite of an apparently correct
-consistency.</p>
-
-<p>The nature of the ink is not only influenced by the
-greasy substance used as a medium, but also by the
-material of the coloring matter itself. This is why many
-inks, in spite of their apparent softness, work tenaciously
-or “short,” while sometimes inks of hard consistency
-smear.</p>
-
-<p>If occasionally the dilution of an ink of too hard
-consistency appears necessary, this is best effected with
-linseed oil varnish, which, however, should not contain
-any driers. If the work has been begun with a stiff ink
-of a certain shade and it is desired to retain this tone
-to the end, it is advisable not to use a thin ink for
-dilution, but to thin down the stiff ink with varnish.</p>
-
-<p><i>Inks of too hard nature</i> are not practicable. Such
-were necessary in the oil-printing process. In the bromoil
-process, which is much less sensitive to the consistency<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_51"></a>[51]</span>
-of the ink, their use merely means a needless
-loss of time. An ink of correct consistency is easily
-taken up and produces quick drawing without smearing,
-while too hard inks are difficult to apply and soon refuse
-to take if they are not diluted.</p>
-
-<p>It is extremely simple and advantageous to prepare
-the inks oneself, as outlined by E. Guttmann in Chapter
-VIII, <a href="#Page_177">p. 177</a>. The process recommended by him is to
-place the powdered colors on a matt glass plate and rub
-up with varnish by means of a muller or pestle. This
-procedure is considerably facilitated, if, according to
-my suggestion, a few drops of a readily volatile oil-solvent
-be added. The ink is thus immediately liquefied
-and can be quickly and perfectly rubbed up. The solvent
-evaporates during the grinding, which is much
-easier than in the old way, and the ink again acquires
-the desired character without suffering in any way.</p>
-
-<p><i>As a palette for the ink</i> the best thing is a piece of
-waxed or parchment paper, fastened on a white support,
-such as a card. Such a palette has the advantage that
-after use it can be discarded without cleaning. Moreover
-the color value of the ink can be fairly easily
-determined on it. If necessary old negatives, or other
-glass, may be used as a palette, and their use also makes
-cleaning unnecessary, which is an unpleasant and messy
-job.</p>
-
-<p>A small quantity of ink should be taken and distributed
-as thinly and evenly as possible on the palette.
-A thick layer is not convenient, as then the brush takes
-up too much ink and too much is deposited at a time
-on the bromoil print. The film of ink should show as
-smooth and uniform a surface as possible; thicker ridges
-should be avoided, because the brush is thus more<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_52"></a>[52]</span>
-strongly inked in spots and therefore transfers the ink
-unevenly to the print. The distributed ink should be
-perfectly homogeneous and flexible. A thin layer of ink
-sets to a skin on its surface after a short time and then
-cannot be used.</p>
-
-<p>This setting also takes place in the body of the ink
-and becomes evident by the formation of a delicate skin
-or hard crumbly particles on the surface of the ink.
-These must always be removed; such hardened inks can
-only with difficulty be distributed on the palette.
-Finally it should be mentioned that hard inks may be
-slightly softened by warming.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Support.</span>—A stout glass plate or drawing board
-should be used as a support, and inclined at an angle
-of about 30 degrees by propping up at the top; <i>a damp
-and elastic pad</i> must be placed on the glass or board.
-<i>This pad is not for the purpose of keeping the print
-damp during the working-up, as is usually stated</i>; on
-the one hand this is superfluous in view of the possibility
-of repeated soaking, which is to be described
-later, and on the other hand it would not produce the
-desired result. It is erroneous to suppose that the water
-which passes from the damp support to the paper side
-can equalize the loss of water which the film suffers
-by evaporation from its surface. The pad should,
-therefore, only be so damp that the bromoil print adheres
-firmly to it, when under the brush. The pad
-should absorb and hold moisture; but this should not
-be imparted to the brush when it touches the pad in
-working-up the edges, otherwise water will be carried
-on to the print and cause spots. <i>For this reason damp
-blotting paper or filter papers should be absolutely rejected
-for the pad.</i> If such papers are used for the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_53"></a>[53]</span>
-damp pad, the brush, which in working the edges must
-inevitably touch them, will not only take up water but
-also the paper fibers and, transferring them to the print,
-cause trouble. Moreover, sheets of paper in a damp
-state are difficult to lay smooth and are scarcely usable.</p>
-
-<p>The best material for the pad is the <i>copying sheets</i>
-used for copying books, which consist of two layers
-of linen with an intermediate film of rubber. Such
-sheets have the advantage that when damp they always
-remain flat and smooth. A damp piece of linen, doubled
-and smoothed out, is also simple and certain. The pad
-must lie absolutely flat, because any ridges become most
-unpleasantly visible in inking-up, particularly with thin
-papers, as the brush always slips from the highest parts
-of the ridges and causes inequalities in the print.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Removal of the Water from the Surface of the
-Print.</span>—After the prepared print is removed from the
-water and laid on the pad, the water adherent to its
-surface must be removed. This is best effected in the
-following way: Take a large, absorbent, lintless cloth,
-spread it smoothly over the print, and press it gently
-with the flat of the hand. By repeating this, the water
-is easily removed without endangering the film; whether
-the drying is complete can be judged by <i>examining it
-obliquely. The freedom of the cloth, used for drying
-the print, from fluff and lint is of great importance.</i>
-If the cloth gives up fibers to the surface of the print,
-these cannot be seen at first. In inking-up, innumerable
-minute dark spots and lines appear on the film, as the
-deposited fibers take the ink very strongly and thus
-suddenly become visible. It is frequently erroneously
-assumed that such troublesome defects come from the
-brush. This is seldom the case; on close examination<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_54"></a>[54]</span>
-these fibers will be seen to be particles of the textile
-material. When possible, linen that has been frequently
-washed should be used for the drying.</p>
-
-<p>When the water is to be removed from a print that
-has already been inked and again soaked, care should
-be taken that the cloth is freed from any folds by damping
-and subsequent drying, for such folds can, when
-pressed on the print, damage the film of ink. Although
-this is not of material importance, as such faults can
-be easily evened out by hopping, yet these small precautions
-avoid unnecessary trouble. Sidewise or wiping
-movements of the cloth should be carefully avoided,
-especially if the print has already been inked, because
-the ink is unnecessarily smeared by the wiping. After
-removal of the cloth one should make sure by examining
-the print obliquely that the water has been completely
-removed from the surface.</p>
-
-<p>It is advisable to keep several cloths ready for drying
-off the film, for this will have to be done fairly frequently
-during the work. <i>Care should be taken to remove
-most carefully every trace of water; water which
-is picked up by the brush causes spots</i>, for the drops of
-water in the brush keep the ink away from the points
-of contact. In such cases it will be seen that white
-spots make their appearance in different parts of the
-print, continuously shifting their position during the
-work. By perfect drying off, these phenomena, which
-are in any case not necessarily important as regards the
-final result, can be avoided. In drying off a print already
-inked-up, the cloth will as a rule remove some ink
-from the surface; such cloths should not be used again
-until they have been washed, because they may transfer
-ink to a place where it is not wanted.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_55"></a>[55]</span></p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Brush Work.</span>—The prepared print, lying flat
-on the pad, and with its surface freed from adherent
-water, should now be inked up.</p>
-
-<p>Before beginning the application of the ink a little
-stiff ink, at least as large as the working surface of the
-brush, should be placed in a corner of the palette. This
-should be spread out flat, thin and free from ridges;
-then the knife should be wiped and a little soft ink
-spread in another place.</p>
-
-<p>The brush should now be pressed down on the <i>hard
-ink</i> already distributed on the glass plate, and the ink
-dabbed very carefully from the brush on a clean place
-of the palette. <i>One should never go with the brush
-direct from the ink itself to the print, as this will form
-a spot which it is difficult to work out. It is of the
-greatest importance always to work with a brush that
-has been well dabbed out and in which the ink is evenly
-distributed.</i> If the brush has not been sufficiently
-dabbed out it leaves on the print a quantity of small,
-much darker and usually linear particles of ink, which
-cannot be distributed or are only removable with difficulty.
-Such spots must then as a rule be removed
-by the method described on <a href="#Page_72">page 72</a>.</p>
-
-<p>The whole brush technique is based on the following
-principle: if the brush charged with ink is placed on
-the print and allowed to remain there for a moment,
-and then <i>slowly</i> lifted up, the ink remains on the image.
-If it is set down sharply and <i>quickly</i> lifted (the so-called
-“hopping”), it removes ink. In the first inking-up of a
-print, the swelling of which has been correctly carried
-out, the application of the ink may be effected by a gentle
-dabbing. A very thin film of ink is thus produced and
-almost simultaneously correctly distributed.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_56"></a>[56]</span></p>
-
-<p>The brush should always be held by the extreme end
-between two fingers, never by the middle or near the
-hairs. <i>The more lightly and more delicately the brush
-is managed the better it works.</i></p>
-
-<p>It is best to begin the work at some characteristic
-place of the picture, which is well known to the worker;
-the ink should first be spread as delicately and evenly
-as possible on a small spot, avoiding, as far as possible,
-going over the same place twice with fresh ink. When
-the place selected has been covered with a light film
-of ink, the surface should be hopped over with light
-movements, when, with correct preparation of the print,
-the outlines will soon appear. <i>A bromoil print correctly
-prepared</i>, and with swelling suitable to the ink used, <i>is
-easily recognizable by the fact that the image appears
-delicately but distinctly under the very first strokes of
-the brush</i>. If this does not happen even after some
-time, either the degree of swelling of the print is too
-low or there is some fault in the preparation of the
-print, such as, for instance, unsuitable paper, a poor
-bromide print, errors in bleaching, etc. The longer the
-hopping continues, the more distinct the details should
-become. Then the application of the ink should be
-continued in places adjacent to those already worked up,
-until finally the whole surface of the print has been
-evenly gone over with ink and the image is visible in
-all its details, although still very thin and delicate. It
-is advisable to use a rough print from the negative as
-a guide.</p>
-
-<p><i>Beginners usually make the mistake of jumping from
-one spot to another without filling up the intervening
-parts.</i> This makes the work more difficult. Inking up
-should be carried out continuously by passing from those<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_57"></a>[57]</span>
-places already worked on to those not inked up. If it
-is noticed that the places which were first inked up
-appear too pale compared to their surroundings, since
-they have still too little ink, they should be inked up
-more strongly. Too dark spots should be evened out
-with the brush by removing the excess of ink and depositing
-it on the less inked parts. The amount of
-ink used on the print is very small; that which is first
-taken up by the brush lasts for a long time. It is not
-necessary to have frequent recourse to the ink spread
-on the palette by the knife, but is much better to take
-up, as long as possible, fresh ink from the spot on the
-palette on which the brush was dabbed.</p>
-
-<p><i>On the other hand, however, every application of the
-brush to the print should actually deposit some ink on
-the print.</i> If those parts touched by the brush do not
-increase in intensity, <i>it must be determined whether
-the dark places on the palette from which ink is supposed
-to be taken, are actually giving up ink</i>; for if the film
-of ink remaining on the palette is too thin, fresh ink
-must be deposited and distributed on it by the brush.</p>
-
-<p>Care should be taken not to overload the brush with
-ink, for then the hairs stick together, distribute the ink
-badly on the print and, moreover, frequently leave large
-coherent particles of ink on the film, thus causing spots.
-As the brush is cut on the slant, it may happen that in
-dabbing out the brush on the palette and in the application
-of the ink to the print, the front and longer part
-of the brush is used more strongly. Then the ink collects
-at the back edge of the brush and causes spots
-when the brush is used more vigorously.</p>
-
-<p>In many cases it is possible to complete the print
-with the hard ink alone. <i>If it is noticed that the hard<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_58"></a>[58]</span>
-ink does not take well on the print and is removed again
-in lifting the brush</i>, its consistency is too stiff for the
-work. One should not then continue to use it, but
-should <i>soften the ink</i> in the following manner: First
-place the brush in the hard ink and dab it out well in
-another place on the palette. Now dip the ends of the
-brush hairs carefully and very lightly into the soft ink
-and dab out the very small quantity of the soft ink
-taken up by the brush on the same spot, on which the
-hard ink has been previously distributed. There is thus
-formed on the palette as well as in the brush a mixture
-of the two inks. Now try carefully whether the now
-softened ink adheres well to the print, by placing the
-brush lightly on a light place of the print. If it leaves
-behind a <i>light</i> trace of ink without any trouble, the
-consistency is correct; but if this does not happen, the
-ink must be diluted again in the same way with the
-soft ink. If on the other hand the brush leaves behind
-a <i>strong</i> trace of ink from a light touch, the ink is too
-soft and requires the addition of some hard ink. <i>It is
-not advisable to mix the soft and hard inks on the palette
-with the knife, as it is very difficult to strike the right
-consistency in this way.</i></p>
-
-<p>This applies to all mixtures and dilutions of the ink
-which may be necessary in the course of the work, as
-in strengthening a colored ink with black, or in the
-preparation of any desired tint by admixture of different
-inks, and finally in softening inks with varnish.
-In all these cases mixing of the inks on the palette
-with the knife puts too much ink into use; also, as long
-as the ink is on the palette, one cannot estimate with
-the necessary exactitude either the tint or the consistency.
-The correct procedure is rather first to go<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_59"></a>[59]</span>
-with the brush to the first color and distribute this on
-a clean place, then set the same brush in the second
-color and make the mixture on the palette by dabbing.
-Then the mixture thus obtained should be tested as
-to its shade of consistency by gentle application to the
-print, and more of one or the other ink added in the
-same way with the brush. It should be noted that
-inks of a soft consistency go a very long way; the whole
-surface of the brush should never be dipped into such
-inks, but only the point of the brush. Softening of the
-inks with varnish should be effected in the same way.</p>
-
-<p>When the first inking up is finished, the addition of
-ink of the same consistency is continued until the print
-is completed or will no longer take ink, which, as has
-already been pointed out, is known by the fact that the
-newly applied ink no longer adheres, but that the brush
-removes it from the print. Then one proceeds to a
-further dilution of the ink by taking more soft ink
-with the brush and adding it to that already mixed,
-and continues the work. The use of the unmixed soft
-ink is not even necessary in many cases. If, however,
-it proves to be necessary, it should be used, but with
-care, for a brush stroke which puts too much soft ink
-on any part of the print, especially in the shadows,
-causes a patch. <i>The beginner will work most easily and
-successfully if he always keeps the applications of ink
-as delicate as possible and obtains depth only by a repeated
-and even coating of ink, fully distributed every
-time.</i> If a place should still turn out to be too dark,
-one can try removing the excess of ink, if it be a hard
-one, with a clean brush. If a dark patch is formed
-by too vigorous application of a mixed or even a soft
-ink, another brush should be dipped into the hard ink,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_60"></a>[60]</span>
-dabbed out, and the spot removed with this brush.
-Moreover, such places can as a rule be easily rectified
-after the second soaking of the print, which will be
-described presently. If the fault cannot be removed in
-this way, the ink must be partially or entirely removed,
-according to the instructions in Chapter III, <a href="#Page_73">page 73</a>,
-and the work begun anew. This should be done without
-hesitation by the learner if the application of the
-ink does not succeed as he desires; the prepared print
-can be used for practice like a school slate by washing
-it off after each attempt with a solvent of the greasy
-medium.</p>
-
-<p>For the application and the hopping off of the ink
-for large areas of the print one should <i>always use the
-whole working surface of the brush</i>. Smaller surfaces
-or outlines should be worked up with the front edge
-of the slantingly-cut brush; in laying on the ink one
-should never continue with the point, because this bends
-and gives unpleasantly sharply defined ink edges. <i>In
-order to cover a place with ink very thoroughly, one
-should hold the brush firmly, give it a slight twist and
-then raise it up straight and slowly.</i> If it is desired to
-coat a whole print evenly with ink, it should be applied
-in stripes over the whole print, the brush being pushed
-forward and not necessarily completely lifted up from
-the surface. The brush is pressed down firmly, the
-pressure relaxed a little, the brush moved forward half
-its width, then pressed again, and so on. In this way
-with a little experience there may be produced perfectly
-even ink stripes which bring out the outlines of the image
-and which are made close together until the whole print
-has been gone over, when one begins with the hopping.
-With papers with marked structure these stripes are<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_61"></a>[61]</span>
-best made in the direction of the structure and not at
-right angles. <i>Especial care should always be taken that
-the shadows of the print, which take the ink most easily,
-are not too strongly inked up, and one should try by
-light hopping to bring out all the desired details at the
-very first application of the ink.</i> When the shadows
-have once taken too much ink, it is not easy to clear
-them up by brush work alone. The inking up of large
-deep shadows must always, therefore, be very carefully
-done. Such parts of the picture are the most strongly
-tanned and therefore take the ink very readily and hold
-it very tenaciously. They should therefore never be
-touched with a brush freshly charged with ink, but
-one should work on the heavier shadows only when
-the brush has given up the greater part of its ink to
-the less sensitive parts of the image. Even then it
-always contains enough ink for the darker parts of the
-print. The first application of ink in the shadows,
-especially, ought never to be heavy and cannot be kept
-too delicate. When the desired details in the shadows
-appear to be well defined, they should then be strengthened.
-But even this should not be effected by a single
-thick coating of ink, but by successive additions of thin
-ink films and hopping after each.</p>
-
-<p>Especial emphasis must be laid on the statement that
-<i>all details</i>, which it is desired to have in the finished
-print, <i>must be brought out by the first application of
-the ink</i>. If parts of the image are strongly inked up
-before the desired details have appeared, it is difficult
-to develop these later. On the other hand, detail,
-which has been brought out in the first inking, cannot
-be suppressed by any further skilful application of ink,
-but only strengthened.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_62"></a>[62]</span></p>
-
-<p>These phenomena can on the other hand be successfully
-used to prevent the appearance of undesirable details
-in the picture. If for artistic reasons one desires
-to suppress detail and work flatly, the parts in question
-should be inked up from the start more strongly and
-evenly, and the hopping be either entirely omitted or
-stopped before the details which are to be omitted are
-brought out.</p>
-
-<p>For beginners especially, it is useful in applying the
-ink, as well as in hopping, to lift the brush after every
-few strokes and examine the results obtained, so as to
-decide on further procedure.</p>
-
-<p>One should accustom oneself to examine the print
-<i>from time to time at a certain distance</i>, while it is being
-worked on; for the correct impression as to whether
-the tonal values are correctly chosen, can be gained
-only at a greater distance; it is then seen more easily
-and clearly whether or not individual parts of the print
-carry too much or too little ink.</p>
-
-<p>Particular parts of the print, which one wishes to have
-<i>more contrasty</i>, should be gone over after the hopping
-with <i>a wiping motion of the brush</i>; the ink is thus removed
-from the raised parts of the relief. If one goes
-too far in this, the inking can be done over again in the
-usual way.</p>
-
-<p>If it is desired to free a brush from the soft ink, it
-should be dipped into hard ink specially spread on the
-palette for this purpose, and dabbed out well on a
-clean place, and this operation repeated two or three
-times, using each time another part of the palette. At
-the end of this manipulation the brush will practically
-no longer contain anything but hard ink.</p>
-
-<p>When one has once learnt the initial steps of brush<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_63"></a>[63]</span>
-technique, in the course of time one fails to notice the
-difference between the laying on and the hopping off
-of the ink. <i>The hand in time acquires an instinctive
-handling of the brush, which takes care at once of both
-the application and the distribution of the ink</i>; if the
-proper relation between the consistency of the ink and
-the degree of swelling of the gelatine has been hit upon,
-a simplified handling of the brush comes of itself, because
-then the application of the ink is especially easy.</p>
-
-<p>When, with papers of rough surface, the grain of the
-paper remains white in the shadows, in spite of hopping,
-such places should be treated by going over them with
-the inked brush with light pressure <i>with a rotary motion</i>.</p>
-
-<p><i>Practice teaches that there is always a definite consistency
-of ink which corresponds to a definite degree
-of swelling</i> and with this the print may be executed
-from start to finish. If the operator has learnt by
-experience what ink consistency corresponds to the existing
-swelling of the film, he will prepare his ink of the
-suitable consistency, and is then in a position to carry
-out the work uninterruptedly without any new mixing
-of the ink.</p>
-
-<p>It is a little difficult for the tyro to answer the question
-as to <i>when the application of the ink should be
-stopped</i>, that is to say, when the print may be looked
-upon as finished. There is frequently a temptation to
-consider the print finished when it is very delicate yet
-completely visible in all its details. The beginner often
-lacks the courage to apply more ink at this stage; he
-usually believes also that the print will take no more
-ink, because, as has been mentioned above, the part of
-the palette from which he has hitherto taken the ink,
-gives up no more. Such prints, which recall sketchy<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_64"></a>[64]</span>
-pencil drawings, deceive one during the work, but only
-satisfy later if this particular technique is suited to the
-character of the picture, which is certainly not always
-the case. One must therefore carefully consider during
-the work whether one should actually stop.</p>
-
-<p>The second danger lies in the opposite direction, and
-is due to the fact that, led on by the constantly increasing
-vigor of the image, <i>one cannot rightly decide
-when to stop</i>. The danger here is that one is tempted
-by the vigor of some part of the picture to make the
-other parts also as strong in color, until by such continued
-action the print is immersed in the deepest
-gloom, which becomes still more gloomy after defatting
-the finished print. Such excess must be avoided as a
-rule. Experience and taste soon teach one to hit the
-happy mean.</p>
-
-<p>The first, delicate and general application of ink,
-which may be considered as a guide print, is in many
-cases somewhat wearisome, especially when the picture
-has large areas of rich, deep shadows. With correct
-preliminary treatment of the print there are no real
-difficulties in the preparation of such a guide print.
-Yet the work, especially with large sizes, is really time-consuming
-and also offers, when considered from the
-artistic standpoint, but little interest, since the actual
-creative work of the operator only begins after the guide
-print is finished; only then is he in a position to actually
-give expression to his artistic feelings by suitable
-inking of the different parts.</p>
-
-<p>Since, therefore, the work in the preparation of the
-guide print is actually quite mechanical, it is natural
-to make use of any means which enables one to facilitate
-and hasten this work.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_65"></a>[65]</span></p>
-
-<p>For this there may be used, but only by the expert
-worker, a method based on the following considerations:</p>
-
-<p>If an ink of suitable consistency is dissolved in a
-suitable solvent, such as benzol, carbon tetrachloride,
-trichlorethylene, etc., the pigment is very evenly disseminated
-in this solvent. If the latter again evaporates,
-the ink deposits in an even coating, unchanged in
-its nature.</p>
-
-<p>It is therefore, possible, in the first application of the
-ink, to use such a solvent on the print and by its aid
-the wearisome mechanical work of the first inking may
-be rapidly and easily carried out.</p>
-
-<p>In practice the method of procedure is as follows:
-there is first produced, on the print which is to be worked
-up, a relief which is vigorous enough to sufficiently
-develop all the detail in the shadows. An ink which
-is fairly stiff for this degree of swelling is chosen; the
-brush is first dipped in the solvent and then into the
-ink, which has been thinly spread on the palette.
-After a few dabbings on the palette the ink solution with
-which the brush is charged is spread on the print with a
-hopping motion and distributed with the same brush
-as evenly as possible. If the distribution becomes difficult
-in consequence of evaporation of the solvent, the
-brush should be again dipped in the solvent, and then
-the distribution can be easily completed. The film of
-ink thus obtained should be fairly thin, but must not
-be quite even.</p>
-
-<p>After the complete evaporation of the solvent, the ink
-is worked up with a clean brush, with which the guide
-print can be finished without trouble and in the briefest
-time.</p>
-
-<p>There are also other variations of this method of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_66"></a>[66]</span>
-the application of dissolved inks. For instance, one
-may first apply some ink with the brush to the print
-and then distribute it with a second brush dipped in the
-solvent; one may also prepare a solution of the ink in
-a dish and paint it on the picture, or bathe the whole
-print in a solution of the ink. All these variants, especially
-the last two, have, however, certain disadvantages,
-so that the procedure first outlined is to be
-preferred.</p>
-
-<p>After the guide print is prepared in this way, the
-further application of the ink is carried out in the
-normal manner.</p>
-
-<p>The solvent is most conveniently chosen so that it is
-not too volatile, as for instance heavy benzol. But it
-ought not to contain any oil. When placed on the surface
-of the hand, it should evaporate fairly slowly, but
-without leaving any trace of grease.</p>
-
-<p>Certain failures, which sometimes appear in this
-process, must be mentioned. If the film of ink is too
-thin, it can be repeated without further trouble in the
-same way, with rather more ink. If, on the other hand,
-too much ink is applied, a complete image is immediately
-formed without any possibility of the shadows being
-worked up. In this case the ink must be again removed
-by the solvent. If individual parts of the picture are
-too dark, from too much ink, it is sufficient to go over
-these parts with a brush dipped in the solvent, in order
-to clear them up.</p>
-
-<p>If, after evaporation of the solvent, great irregularities
-in the distribution of the ink are seen, as for instance,
-spots and streaks which cannot be easily worked out,
-the print should again be placed in water; after drying
-off, the evening-up may be carried out without difficulty.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_67"></a>[67]</span></p>
-
-<p>If in hopping with the second clean brush the image
-does not appear at once without trouble, either the relief
-was too low, or the ink too soft, or the solvent contained
-oil.</p>
-
-<p>The ink can obviously be placed on the bromoil print
-not only with the brush but with any other suitable ink
-carrier, such as <i>rollers</i>. Yet by this the process is rendered
-<i>more mechanical</i> and deprived of all those great
-advantages, which distinguish it from all other printing
-methods. <i>Especially, the possibility of local treatment
-is mostly lost</i>; the unlimited command of the tonal
-values and the structure of the ink can only be guaranteed
-by the use of the brush. The only offset to this
-loss is a gain in speed. Agility, however, is not sought
-after in artistic labors. If one wants to prepare a lot
-of prints quickly, it is better to use the bromide process,
-which is especially suitable for such a task, and thus
-save the trouble of the bleaching and the other processes
-necessary in making bromoil prints.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Resoaking of the Print During the Working-up.</span>—<i>Resoaking
-the print during the inking up, without
-regard to the existent film of ink, is one of the most important
-aids in the bromoil process.</i></p>
-
-<p>This procedure is based on the following considerations:
-It has already been pointed out that the prepared
-gelatine film possesses the property of again assuming
-after drying the same degree of relief which was imparted
-to it by the warm water bath. When a swollen
-print is taken out of the water and placed on the pad
-for working up, evaporation immediately begins at the
-surface of the film; the gelatine, therefore, continuously
-gives up water to the surrounding air during the work,
-and more quickly in proportion as the air is drier and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_68"></a>[68]</span>
-warmer. As has already been mentioned, the damp pad
-does not alter this, since the supply of water from the
-pad through the paper is not sufficient to restore the
-water content of the film. Therefore, while one inks up
-one part of the print, all other parts gradually lose their
-water; and since it is this water which renders the
-gelatine, after its tanning, capable of repelling or taking
-the greasy ink, the work gradually becomes more and
-more difficult. The gelatine film, which feels smooth
-when the film is removed from the water, especially in
-the high lights and any exposed margins, becomes gradually
-leathery. It may still take ink, but the distribution
-of this, and especially the development of the drawing
-and the details, become more and more difficult.</p>
-
-<p><i>If, however, the print, which is partly or entirely inked
-up, is again placed in water and this time in cold water,
-the gelatine film very rapidly absorbs this and again
-attains the same degree of relief that it had at first.</i>
-Sometimes it appears as though a marked clearing up
-of the image takes place in the water; the high lights
-become cleaner, and many details appear in the shadows
-which were not visible during the working-up. On the
-other hand, with some inks the picture appears to become
-weaker under the water. This, however, is only
-an illusion and is of no importance, as in drying, or in
-again going over the picture with the brush, the image
-again attains the previous depth and color and still
-greater clearness.</p>
-
-<p>Here also, one must take care that the print is <i>completely
-immersed</i> and that no air bells adhere to the film,
-since those places to which the water does not have
-access do not reswell, and on further work may give
-rise to spots. In removing the print from the water<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_69"></a>[69]</span>
-the inked-up surface should not be touched with the
-fingers, or finger prints will remain in the ink. The
-print should therefore be taken hold of by the edges.</p>
-
-<p>While the print is soaking in the water, the bringing
-out of the details, especially in the shadows, may be
-facilitated by stroking those parts with the tip of the
-finger or a swab of absorbent cotton. In the same way
-dirt which has collected on the surface during the work
-may be removed. In the latter case one may also use
-more vigorous friction, even though the ink film is thus
-removed, since the removal of the troublesome particles
-is more important than saving the thin film of ink,
-which can be easily renewed.</p>
-
-<p>The print is then removed from the water, placed
-on the pad, and dried as previously by spreading over
-and pressing down a lintless cloth, although because of
-the film of ink any wiping action should be avoided.
-Then when the brush work is resumed, it can be completed
-in an extraordinarily easy manner.</p>
-
-<p>It should be specially noted that the print must be
-<i>worked up after this second soaking with the same brush
-as before, which need not be recharged with ink</i>. Only
-after the print has been hopped in this way, should fresh
-ink be applied.</p>
-
-<p>During the work, the bromoil print, as a rule, will
-scarcely retain the necessary degree of dampness longer
-than a quarter of an hour, and not this long in dry and
-warm weather.</p>
-
-<p><i>The resoaking of the print should be undertaken
-without hesitation as often as any difficulty in the distribution
-of the ink is met with; for this saves a great
-part of the brush work</i>, and almost automatically brings
-out contrasts and details. Especially while learning the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_70"></a>[70]</span>
-process and later with more difficult prints, the work
-is most conveniently divided as follows: first application
-of the ink and distribution by hopping, as long as it is
-easy; resoaking the print; drying off and hopping anew
-with the brush not freshly charged with ink; second
-application of the ink and hopping of the ink now applied;
-another soaking, and so on. The operation may
-be repeated as often as desired without the film taking
-any harm.</p>
-
-<p>Because of the possibility of always bringing the print
-to the correct degree of relief during the brush work
-by means of resoaking, <i>there is absolutely no limit to
-the size of the bromoil print</i>. One can simply finish a
-part of a print of any desired size and then, after another
-soaking, go on to the next part and so on until
-the whole print is inked.</p>
-
-<p>If the relief of the film corresponds to the desires
-of the operator, the bromoil print may be finished completely
-in this way. <i>If it is seen that the relief is not
-sufficient to give the desired modeling and contrast, the
-resoaking may be effected with warmer water than was
-used at first.</i> Yet, until the worker has completely
-mastered the process, this should be done carefully and
-the temperature of the water gradually raised by adding
-hot water, in steps of not more than five degrees, until
-the requisite relief is attained. The use of a <i>thermometer</i>
-is here absolutely essential, for the estimation
-of the temperature of the water by the hand is quite
-unreliable and may lead to the greatest errors. This
-applies to all water baths used in the bromoil process.
-At this point it should be noted that a print, which on
-account of its characteristics has to be placed at the
-beginning in very hot water to attain the necessary relief,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_71"></a>[71]</span>
-is usually covered with very tiny air bells, which
-can easily be overlooked; they must be removed by
-wiping under water so as to avoid troublesome spots.</p>
-
-<p>If the relief of the whole print is satisfactory, but,
-because of the character of the negative, a few places
-in the deep shadows do not show the necessary details,
-the desired shadow detail might possibly be attained
-by increasing the whole relief, yet at the same time the
-relief in the rest of the image would be carried too far.
-In such cases, the places which should be relatively
-more swollen can be separately more highly swollen
-while the rest of the surface of the print retains the
-original relief, by pressing on them a cloth soaked in
-warm water or a suitably formed swab of absorbent
-cotton. A still stronger effect is obtained when such
-places are painted with a water-color brush charged with
-a one per cent solution of ammonia, either on the film
-or, after previously marking the outlines, on the back.</p>
-
-<p>When the relief of the gelatine has been increased
-by soaking in water which is warmer than that used for
-the first bath, certain precautions must be observed in
-removing it from the water. It frequently happens,
-when using certain inks, that <i>the water which runs from
-the film causes streaks and spots</i>, and that evening these
-out is at least troublesome and frequently very difficult.
-This action, which does not occur when resoaking in a
-bath of the same or a lower temperature, is explained
-by the fact that the greasy medium of the ink is liquefied
-by the high temperature of the water, and runs down
-irregularly or mixes with the water and is carried off
-by it. There are thus formed on the film of ink marks
-which show the form of the streams of water which
-have run off. Such troubles may be avoided by bringing<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_72"></a>[72]</span>
-the support close to the dish in which the print is
-soaked, lifting the print out of the water as far as possible
-in a horizontal position and placing it in the same
-position on the support, and immediately spreading the
-previously dried cloth over it and carefully drying. By
-observing this precaution, the running off of the water
-from the film, which is the cause of this difficulty, is
-prevented. Any traces left by the cloth, used for drying
-off, can be easily evened out again by the brush.</p>
-
-<p>By making use of this soaking of the print during the
-work, the bromoil printer <i>is absolutely unlimited in the
-time used for his work and is not driven by any necessity
-for haste</i>. He can continue his work in peace and
-without hurry, and devote himself to any particular part
-of his picture at will, without being afraid that other
-parts will meanwhile lose their capacity for being
-worked up.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Removal of the Ink from the Surface.</span>—If,
-in the application of the ink, a fault occurs, which
-for any reason cannot be corrected with the brush, or
-if one sees in the course of the work that the ink film
-is not satisfactory in tonal values or shading, the print
-would have to be discarded, if it were not possible to
-remove the ink without damage to the film. This is
-feasible, however, without any special difficulty; one
-need not, therefore, throw away such a print, but after
-removal of the ink can again ink it up, but this time
-with avoidance of the previous fault.</p>
-
-<p><i>If there are only small faulty places, the ink may be
-removed from the print as it lies on the pad, as follows</i>:</p>
-
-<p>Cut a small piece of transparent, waxed paper, or,
-lacking this, of thin smooth white paper of approximately
-the shape of the overinked spot, but slightly<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_73"></a>[73]</span>
-larger, and place it on the faulty spot, turning up a
-little corner so as to be able to lift the paper again.
-Then rub with the finger tip carefully and pull off. The
-ink is thus removed from the bromoil print and transferred
-to the paper. If the removal is not complete,
-the operation is repeated with a second piece of waxed
-paper. If very small places, as, for instance, the eyes
-of a portrait, have to be dealt with, the rubbing should
-be done with a round stick, such as a penholder.</p>
-
-<p><i>By inking again, the part that has been thus removed
-may be replaced without any trace of a correction.</i></p>
-
-<p>If the whole film of ink is to be removed from a bromoil
-print, <i>a soft dry cloth or better still a swab of
-absorbent cotton should be soaked in benzol or other
-solvent, and the picture washed with it</i>. The medium
-of the ink is dissolved by the benzol and the ink taken
-up by the wiping cloth.</p>
-
-<p>Every stroke must be made with a clean portion of
-the swab, which must frequently be soaked again with
-benzol, otherwise the ink dissolved by the benzol and
-taken up by the swab will be again put down on the
-paper. If, after washing with benzol some traces of
-ink still remain on the film, the print should be
-<i>immersed in water, but only after the benzol has completely
-evaporated not only from the film but also from
-the fibers of the paper</i>, and it should then be gently
-wiped with the finger. Even if the film still shows a
-slight tint after this, the working-up may be begun again
-successfully, since the traces of the previous inking disappear
-under the new application of ink.</p>
-
-<p>This complete removal of the ink with benzol may
-also be repeatedly effected. <i>Beginners can, therefore,
-use any prepared print several times for experiments.</i><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_74"></a>[74]</span>
-But experts should not think of washing an unsatisfactory
-print with benzol. Those who possess a transfer
-machine can remove the film of ink mechanically in the
-simplest way by transfer.</p>
-
-<p><i>If it is desired to remove the ink from very small
-portions of the print</i>, this is most easily effected by repeated
-use of <i>art-gum</i>, which should be sharpened to
-a point. After every application of the art-gum, a fresh
-surface of the gum must be used, so that the ink is not
-again transferred to the picture. It should be noted,
-however, that repeated use of the gum on the same spot
-may cause blisters.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Failures.</span>—To assist the beginner, some possible
-failures will be here described.</p>
-
-<p>It may happen that during the inking <i>the print becomes
-covered with fibers and small hairs of the most
-different shapes</i>. This phenomenon may sometimes become
-so troublesome that a successful print appears
-problematical. It is frequently <i>incorrectly assumed</i> that
-these impurities are <i>caused entirely by the brush</i>. Hairs
-that have fallen from the brush are always recognizable
-as such, for they are straight, relatively thick, lie entirely
-on the surface of the film, and can be easily
-removed. When there is an excessive appearance of
-<i>fibers</i>, they are due to the use of an unsuitable cloth for
-drying. The fibers are of the most different shapes,
-from dots to recurved and entangled lines.</p>
-
-<p>From the fact that they always appear most strongly
-and frequently during the inking up, it is frequently
-erroneously assumed that they are caused by the brush
-used for the inking, or that dust is deposited from the
-air; this is not so. A dirty brush may be to blame;
-mostly, however, they are fibers of very different shapes,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_75"></a>[75]</span>
-which are brought on to the damp and somewhat tacky
-gelatine film by the pressure of an unsuitable cloth,
-which is not free from lint, and they are held fast by
-the gelatine and torn from the cloth as this is lifted.
-At first these thin and almost transparent fibers are not
-visible. But they take the ink, and thus it happens
-that they seem to appear in ever increasing numbers
-during the inking. If <i>individual</i> fibers (which may
-come from an otherwise suitable cloth), or brush hairs
-that have fallen out, have to be removed, this is readily
-effected by <i>art-gum</i>, worked to a point with the fingers.
-With such a point long fibers can be very easily lifted
-from the film, while the tiny cloth fibers cling very
-firmly to the film. A small white spot, where the gum
-point has touched, remains, as this removed the ink also
-from the gelatine. Such points can be completely closed
-up by repeatedly going over them with the brush.</p>
-
-<p>Single hairs or fibers lying on the surface may be
-allowed to remain, when they occur in places where for
-any reason one must not destroy the ink film; they can
-be very easily removed from the film with a sharp instrument
-in the after treatment of the finished print;
-usually they leave scarcely any mark.</p>
-
-<p>If, on the other hand, the fibers have appeared in
-large numbers, the print should be immersed in water
-and one should try to remove them by gentle friction
-with the tip of the finger, which is generally successful,
-even if the film of ink is also removed at the same time.
-If, however, the fibers adhere so firmly that they cannot
-be removed in this way, which is particularly likely to
-happen in the shadows, the whole coating of ink must
-be removed in the manner outlined in the previous
-section, <a href="#Page_73">page 73</a>.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_76"></a>[76]</span></p>
-
-<p>The only safeguard against the appearance of this
-difficulty is the use of a material as free from lint as
-possible for drying the film.</p>
-
-<p>It may happen that <i>the print takes the first hard ink
-instantly and very readily</i>, but that even with long
-hopping clearness of the details is not obtained; the
-picture indeed shows up well, but remains muddy, as
-even the high lights retain the ink and become darker
-with further application of the ink. Then, as a rule,
-the requisite relief has not yet been attained, and the
-print must be placed in warmer water. If all the instructions
-for the development of the bromide print, the
-bleaching and the swelling have been adhered to, and
-success is still wanting, then the fault lies in the paper,
-which was hardened too much in manufacture. The
-bromoil process is based on the fact that the shadows
-are tanned more than the high lights, and that then the
-tanned places take up more ink than the untanned.
-If the whole film was completely hardened from the start,
-there cannot be more tanning added by the bleaching,
-and the ink will take everywhere, in the lights and in
-the shadows.</p>
-
-<p><i>If the high lights of the picture completely repel any
-grade of ink</i>, while this adheres thickly in the shadows,
-then the formation of the relief has been forced too far.</p>
-
-<p>If the print <i>takes the ink neither in the high lights
-nor the shadows</i>, there is either a fault in the preliminary
-preparation, as, for instance, bleaching in too warm a
-solution, or one too strongly acidified, or the print has
-been acted on too energetically by the ammonia bath.
-In the last case the print may be dried and again swollen
-in water.</p>
-
-<p><i>If large or small irregular spots</i> which take the ink<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_77"></a>[77]</span>
-more strongly than the surrounding parts, <i>are formed
-during the inking</i>, the reason is either that the prints
-have lain one on top of the other in the preliminary
-baths, or the film has been prevented from swelling by
-air bubbles, or by having risen out of the water. Thus
-certain places are less well prepared or are not swollen,
-and therefore behave as though they had been more
-strongly tanned, that is to say, they take even the first
-ink strongly and stand out from their surroundings as
-spots and streaks. Sometimes such spots are improved
-by putting more ink on the print; if they are not of
-large area and are in the less important parts of the
-picture, they may be ignored, as they can be removed
-from the finished print without special trouble, as will
-be explained later. If, however, the spots have a large
-area, or occur in an important part of the picture, for
-instance, in the eyes of a portrait, it is preferable to
-stop further work. As a matter of fact, all such blemishes
-may be removed by after treatment of the print,
-but the trouble entailed by the correction of large faults
-is greater than the work of preparing a new print.</p>
-
-<p>Sometimes darker spots or streaks of irregular outline
-show themselves during the work, which from their shape
-cannot be ascribed either to air bubbles or to partial
-sinking of the relief. Then there are probably irregularities
-in the gelatine coating, for which the preliminary
-treatment of the bromide print is not responsible.</p>
-
-<p>If the print shows a satisfactory relief, but still takes
-the ink badly or not at all, the reason is in the incorrect
-composition of the bleaching solution, or the <i>omission
-of the intermediate drying</i> after bleaching.</p>
-
-<p>Finally it may happen that the image <i>appears</i> almost
-<i>as a negative</i> during inking-up, since the high lights<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_78"></a>[78]</span>
-take the ink quicker than the shadows. This phenomenon
-appears when the intermediate drying after bleaching
-has been omitted, or if <i>the work has been begun
-with too soft an ink</i>. In such cases, if too much ink
-has not been applied, the fault can be corrected by
-further working-up with a hard ink. If this is of no
-use, all the ink must be removed from the faulty places
-in the manner already described.</p>
-
-<p>If during the inking-up <i>small irregular white spots in
-groups</i> show themselves and shift their places, then there
-are drops of water in the brush or on the print. The
-print should be dried, the brush also, and the spots
-hopped dry and worked over.</p>
-
-<p><i>Yellow or brown spots and patches</i>, which often appear
-during the work, increasing in number and continually
-enlarging, or even penetrating through the film
-into the fiber of the paper, are to be ascribed to the
-fact that particles of amidol were deposited on the film
-before the soaking of the print. When these particles
-dissolve in water they cause the trouble just described.
-If there are merely scattered spots of this kind which
-have not penetrated the paper, they may be scraped out
-of the finished print and then retouched. The real
-remedy, however, is in keeping the amidol carefully
-closed and as far as possible not in the same room as
-the prepared prints.</p>
-
-<p><i>Ink streaks</i>, which a print treated with a soft ink
-shows when it is taken out of the warm water, only
-appear when the print is placed in a slanting or vertical
-position; they can be avoided by taking the print from
-the water and immediately bringing it into a horizontal
-position on the support and rapidly drying, so that the
-water cannot run off.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_79"></a>[79]</span></p>
-
-<p>The failures caused by the use of the ammonia bath
-were described on <a href="#Page_46">page 46</a>.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Alteration of the Character of the Picture by
-the Inking.</span>—If the inking is carried out exactly according
-to the previous instructions, which have been
-given chiefly for the benefit of beginners, the result will
-be a picture which, as regards gradation, will be like
-the original bromide print before it was bleached. The
-finished bromoil print, produced by a perfectly even
-application of ink over the whole picture by means of
-successive additions, each thoroughly worked over with
-the brush, differs from the original bromide print in
-coloration, structure, more extended gradation, and
-change in the character of its surface. As the worker
-is at liberty to stop at any desired stage of the work,
-he can obtain from the original bromide print, according
-to his taste, a delicate light-toned bromoil or a very rich
-and highly modulated print, or any intermediate stage
-between these two extremes.</p>
-
-<p>Yet these possibilities by themselves alone would not
-justify the conversion of the original bromide print
-into a bromoil. The substitution of a new photographic
-positive process for an old one is only justified if the
-new process accomplishes something essentially different
-and above all something better. But absolutely uniform
-working over of the bleached bromide print with greasy
-inks does not completely fulfil this postulate. Mere
-changes of gradation of the whole picture or of its color
-can certainly be attained by simpler photographic
-methods. The extraordinary advantages of the bromoil
-process lie in other directions.</p>
-
-<p><i>Bromoil printing, for instance, permits us to ink any
-individual part of the print more or less, or even not<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_80"></a>[80]</span>
-at all, at will</i>; it is possible to give enormous brilliance
-and aerial perspective to the high lights; they may show
-when finished every tonal value represented in the negative;
-it is also possible to darken them to an extraordinary
-extent by the application of more or softer ink.
-On the other hand, the shadows may be kept perfectly
-light by omitting to ink them or by very delicate treatment,
-or, by successive applications of the ink, they may
-be strengthened to very great intensity and yet retain
-all their details.</p>
-
-<p><i>The worker has wide opportunity for control in the
-local treatment of his prints. His dependence on the
-negative is limited to the drawing, while in the treatment
-of the tonal values he is absolute master.</i> Most
-of the other positive processes are dependent on the
-negative for their extremes of depth and of delicacy;
-the bromoil process does not know this dependence.
-If it is desired to obtain a delicate picture from any
-negative, one uses only a little ink, and hops it off
-thoroughly; then there may be obtained from even <i>the
-most contrasty negative a delicate print, but one thoroughly
-worked out in all its details</i>. On the other
-hand, there is practically no limit to the continued
-application of ink; the film is still capable of taking up
-more ink, long after the limits of artistic pictorial effect
-have been passed. The result is that in the bromoil
-process <i>vigor and depth of the shadows can be produced
-in any desired intensity</i>. The most striking advantage
-of the process lies, however, in the possibility of changing
-the tonal values of any individual portion of the
-print at will.</p>
-
-<p>If for example, a negative was used in making the
-original bromide print which had been taken without<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_81"></a>[81]</span>
-any attention to the requirements for getting correct
-tones, by suitable treatment in making the bromoil one
-can obtain an approximately correct print without special
-trouble, since one can, for instance, convert an absolutely
-clogged-up sky, which is pure white in the bromide
-print, to a suitable grey tone by the use of soft
-ink, and at the same time lighten foliage which is too
-dark; a flat print, wanting in plasticity, may be improved
-by making objects in the foreground more vigorous,
-and accentuating appropriate parts of the middle
-distance. It is easily possible to supply the lacking
-aerial perspective of certain kinds of prints. In portrait
-work in the bromoil process, skilful workmanship renders
-one absolutely independent of the nature of the
-background. A light background can be made dark,
-a dark one light. In portraits taken out of doors, the
-small details of the background that are out of focus
-or obtrusive may be omitted, toned down or completely
-remodeled. Unpleasing details of the clothing or the
-hair can be omitted or so far softened down that they
-are no longer disturbing. We are able to accentuate
-certain parts of the picture to make them dominant,
-while other parts of the image may be treated very
-sketchily; in short, the possibilities of control which this
-process offers are almost inexhaustible.</p>
-
-<p>I will now try to outline the methods of carrying out
-some of these modifications, as far as is possible without
-practical demonstration.</p>
-
-<p>The beginner is first of all recommended to use a
-proof print from the negative as a check, so that he
-may have a clear idea as to what changes he needs to
-make, and so that further, in carrying out his ideas, he
-does not change neighboring parts of the print which<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_82"></a>[82]</span>
-should remain unchanged. The simplest example of
-control is the <i>lightening of the shadows</i>. This is done
-by very careful application of the ink, which is stopped
-before the shadow parts become too dark. One should
-avoid touching such parts later with the brush, when it
-is charged with soft ink.</p>
-
-<p>If light portions are to be made darker, the procedure
-depends upon the size of the parts involved. Extensive
-parts of the picture in high relief, as for instance the
-sky, should be gone over as evenly as possible with a
-suitable soft ink, and with this, simultaneously, by going
-lightly over the lighter places and applying it more
-heavily here and there, clouds may be put in. The evenness
-of the inking is of the greatest importance here,
-as it cannot later be hopped off very much; frequently
-in such cases the ink only lies on the surface, without
-adhering firmly; if left untouched, it combines intimately
-with the surface when the print is dry, but is easily removed
-by hopping. It is possible to change the outlines
-of neighboring parts of the image; if too dark edges are
-formed, they can be easily softened by after treatment
-of the finished print. In some cases it may be necessary
-to add considerable quantities of varnish or linseed oil
-to dilute the ink. The darkening of too light places
-may be also effected by dabbing ink with the brush on
-the finished dried print, which the print then naturally
-takes all over.</p>
-
-<p><i>If tiny light patches are to be made darker</i>, the point
-of the large brush, or if necessary of a very small brush
-should be used, avoiding any disturbance of surrounding
-parts, as far as possible. Such changes are difficult only
-when the bright spots that are to be worked out are in
-immediate contact with very dark parts. The process<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_83"></a>[83]</span>
-is much simpler when parts of the print of medium tones,
-which are surrounded by lighter parts, are to be darkened.
-If, for instance, the eyes of a portrait are to be
-darkened, ink should be applied to the whole of the
-eye with a small brush, and then hopped off. A tree
-trunk, which must be brought out in relief, should be
-covered throughout its whole length with soft ink, and
-the ink should then be worked over, by hopping it
-from the lighter toward the darker parts. In practice,
-the bringing together of neighboring tones, which differ
-considerably in value, can be easily effected by <i>hopping
-off the ink from the darker parts</i> with a brush that has
-not been freshly charged with ink, <i>and depositing it
-on the lighter parts</i>. The lightening of too dark places
-can also be attained by going over them with a perfectly
-clean brush that has not been dipped in the ink.
-Isolated high lights can be accentuated by touching
-them with a pointed water-color brush, dipped in water;
-then the film swells and repels the ink. <i>Stained high
-lights or too dark middle tones</i> may be lightened by
-wetting a brush of proper size by means of a wet cloth
-and then lightly hopping with this the places which are
-to be corrected. The brush picks up the color, but
-must be immediately cleaned by rubbing it on a clean
-portion of the palette, after which it may be again wet
-and used again. Clouds can be worked into dark parts
-of the sky in this way.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Structure of the Ink.</span>—Independently of the
-surface of the paper on which the work is done, <i>the
-structure of the coating of ink can be influenced by the
-nature of the brush work</i>. If a brush well charged with
-ink has its full surface placed firmly on the gelatine
-film and then slowly lifted up, an impression of the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_84"></a>[84]</span>
-surface of the brush remains; the individual hairs or
-groups of hairs of the brush have each deposited a
-part of the ink that they had taken up, and a very
-coarse-grained spot of ink is produced. If we now hop,
-that is, dab with quick light blows of the brush, the ink
-begins to be distributed, since it is taken away from the
-lighter parts and taken up by the shadows. The drawing
-of the picture <i>thus appears under the brush, at first
-with a very coarse grain and without many details</i>. The
-longer one hops and thus distributes the ink, the finer
-becomes the grain, and it especially becomes much finer
-on the addition of softer ink. <i>The bromoil printer
-hence has it completely within his power to limit the
-division of the ink to any desired coarseness of grain</i>,
-assuming, of course, that he has suited the consistency
-of the ink to the degree of relief, and is therefore able
-to completely finish the print with the original ink without
-adding any softer. Prints may thus be prepared,
-which because of their coarse structure, resemble certain
-graphic methods. But, when this is intended, the application
-of the ink must be carried on as evenly as
-possible from the beginning, so that it needs very little
-hopping off, for any considerable amount of hopping
-unavoidably produces a finer grain. Even if the use
-of softer inks is necessary, a coarse structure can be obtained
-by suitable brush work. <i>The longer, however,
-the ink is distributed by hopping, the finer becomes the
-structure of the ink film</i> and the smoother the surface.</p>
-
-<p><i>The most perfect smoothness is also attainable</i>, if it
-is desired for any reason. For this a not too volatile
-solvent should be used, such as heavy benzol. The
-method of using this is as follows: when the print has
-been fully inked and is complete, though still somewhat<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_85"></a>[85]</span>
-coarse-grained, a cloth should be wet with the benzol,
-and the brush lightly pressed thereon and then passed
-quickly over the desired parts of the picture. At first
-a smeared spot is formed on the surface of the print;
-by continued gentle hopping the spot is gradually worked
-out, and by continued working we get a fineness of
-detail, equal to that of printing-out paper. It is true
-that even the highest lights acquire a delicate film of
-ink, so that a print treated in this way is somewhat
-low in key. If the hopping with the brush charged with
-benzol is not continued until the finest possible grain
-is attained, a misty effect may be produced, with some
-suppression of the finest details; a method which is frequently
-useful in the production of landscapes.</p>
-
-<p>By suitable ink and brush technique the effect of any
-other known photographic printing process may be attained
-in bromoil printing, from the rich-in-detail gloss
-of collodio-chloride paper to the characteristic effects
-of gum-bichromate. Yet the far-reaching possibilities
-which bromoil places at our command really only begin
-where most of the other processes end.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Different Methods of Working.</span>—In the following
-pages some of the different methods of technique,
-which the bromoil process permits, will be briefly
-sketched. Obviously, however, the description of these
-methods cannot be made complete without practical
-demonstration. Nor can all conceivable methods of
-working be mentioned, as individual treatment of the
-process can be varied in many ways.</p>
-
-<p>We will first describe the method of working which
-is most suitable <i>for the beginner</i>, because it offers
-tolerable certainty to those who have not yet mastered
-the process.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_86"></a>[86]</span></p>
-
-<p>The beginner, in order to obtain good results, must
-start with a bromide print as clean and well-modeled as
-possible, and its high lights should not be fogged in the
-least. He should place the print, bleached and prepared
-exactly according to the methods detailed in this book,
-in water at about 18° C. (65° F.), leave it there for
-a few minutes, dry its surface, and begin the application
-of the ink with the stiffer ink, which should be thinly
-applied and then worked over until the hopping brings
-out no further detail. If the drawing of the image
-does not quickly appear upon hopping the print, and
-the result is only a detailless patch of ink, the original
-temperature of the soaking bath must be increased.
-Then the print should be again immersed in the water,
-left for two minutes, and again dried. The work of
-hopping is now continued with the same brush with
-which the print was originally treated, <i>and without its
-having been again put into the ink</i>. As a rule the mere
-placing of the print in water again will have increased
-the contrasts, and new details will have appeared, which
-can be considerably accentuated by now going over with
-the brush. Only when the print has been again worked
-over, should fresh ink be carefully applied with the
-brush; this should then be distributed by hopping, and
-the print again soaked in water. The procedure thus
-outlined: application of the ink, hopping, soaking, going
-over it with the empty brush, fresh ink application,
-hopping, soaking, and so on, is continued as
-long as the print gains in strength and depth, without
-becoming dull or muddy. If, however, this point
-is reached, the inked print should be immersed in
-water at a rather higher temperature and left in
-it for some minutes. The print is then further<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_87"></a>[87]</span>
-treated with the brush, without fresh inking, and will
-soon become much clearer in the high lights. If the
-clearing thus obtained is not sufficient, the temperature
-of the water bath should be increased by a few degrees,
-but not more than 5° C. (9° F.) at a time. As the
-high lights become clearer it may happen that the stiff
-ink will no longer be taken up. Then it is necessary
-to soften it a little. This method of working will
-guarantee to the beginner the attainment of good results
-with tolerable certainty.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Hard Ink Technique</span> (<i>Coarse-grain Prints</i>).—If it
-is desired to prepare a bromoil print of <i>rough surface
-and coarser character</i>, the worker must be able to finish
-the print exclusively with a relatively hard ink. For
-this it is necessary to determine by trial the temperature
-of the water bath at which the film of the print acquires
-a relief which is absolutely suitable for the stiff ink.
-When this degree of relief has been found, the print
-should be inked up strongly but evenly from the very
-start, so that one is not compelled to go over individual
-places several times with the brush. Thus the coarse
-structure of the ink is obtained. The use of hog’s
-bristle brushes is also efficacious in coarse-grained
-work.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Soft Ink Technique.</span>—This method of working is
-used on the one hand for the preparation of low-toned
-misty effects, on the other hand to obtain fully and
-richly modeled prints. In the first case the bromide
-print should be correctly exposed, but not completely
-developed; while in the second case it should be thoroughly
-developed. The print is then, according to the
-choice of the operator, either brought at once to a fairly
-high relief, or only gradually raised to the same relief<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_88"></a>[88]</span>
-during the application of the ink. Then, in the course
-of inking, a point is soon reached at which the stiffer
-ink is repelled by the high lights and perhaps also by
-the lighter half-tones, and during the hopping is again
-taken up by the brush. Then the ink should be carefully
-softened with linseed oil or varnish, and the whole
-print gone over with the softer ink. Prints which are
-executed in the soft ink technique are characterized by
-a specially fine velvety surface after defatting.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Sketch Technique.</span>—If one proposes to completely
-work up certain parts of a print and leave the rest
-treated in a sketchy manner, and possibly to omit some
-parts altogether, one should begin by working up the
-part which should stand out. Thus, in a portrait, the
-head should be first worked up; then proceed systematically,
-with the ink remaining in the brush, to sketch
-in the clothing and the background, and perhaps leave
-unimportant parts of the print completely untouched.
-To facilitate the work, disturbing details or a too prominent
-background may be removed or reduced on the
-bromide print, before bleaching, with dilute Farmer’s
-reducer. If, when the work is finished, the parts that
-have not been inked are visible through their relief and
-glossiness, these traces of the uninked picture completely
-disappear in drying, if the original bromide print was
-not developed too vigorously. If one contemplates producing
-a vignette, it is absolutely unnecessary to obtain
-this by the use of masks or vignetters when making the
-bromide print. The effects which result from the suitable
-treatment of the bromoil print are far more free
-and beautiful.</p>
-
-<p>If certain parts of the picture are to be accentuated
-and all the rest is to be rendered visible, even if only<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_89"></a>[89]</span>
-sketchily, one may also work in the reverse way. The
-whole picture should be given a thin coating of ink,
-as even as possible, which should be hopped only just
-enough to barely bring out the drawing. Then work
-out those parts, to which attention is to be directed,
-keeping as closely as possible to the outlines. When
-these, the most important parts of the print, are finished,
-it is frequently seen that the rest of the picture is too
-delicate. This should then be gone over again with the
-ink as at first, without completely working it up, until
-the correct tonal value is attained. Then the necessary
-harmony is obtained by going over the outlines with
-the brush.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Large Heads.</span>—The far-reaching possibilities of the
-bromoil process offer special advantages for the free
-modification of tones in portraits. It is advisable to
-take the portraits with a neutral or dark background.
-The only exception is when a head is to be done in red
-chalk, when a white background is preferable. Starting
-from such a negative in bromoil printing the background
-may be kept, according to choice, either light or very
-dark, or be shaded. One precaution should, however,
-be observed in every case; before starting on the head
-itself, the background should be worked in lightly from
-the margins toward the head, so that no dark line may
-be formed when working on the outlines of the portrait.
-If this shows during the work, it must be worked down
-to harmony with the background at once before it gets
-too dark. One can, therefore, from a given negative,
-produce at will either a fully worked-up head against
-a dark ground, or a light, sketchy image on the light
-background of the paper, or any intermediate stage.</p>
-
-<p>If, as previously suggested, parts of the picture are<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_90"></a>[90]</span>
-to be treated sketchily, while others are to be fully
-worked up, the parts which should appear sketchy are
-allowed to remain coarse-grained, while the structure
-gradually becomes finer in passing into the worked-up
-portions. No portion, however, should be made perfectly
-structureless. Bromoil prints thus worked up are
-much more artistic than those pictures which are known
-by the name of photo-sketches. The latter usually
-show a head, printed with all the gradation and fullness
-of detail given by printing-out paper. The tone becomes
-gradually lighter toward the edges, where we find some
-strong lines, imitating the character of a line drawing,
-all surrounded by a perfectly white background. To
-the trained eye the technique of such photo-sketches is
-abominable, for the contrast between the inimitable
-detail of the head and the perfectly blank background
-is so great that it cannot be bridged over by the effort
-to imitate the manner of an etching. On the other hand,
-such problems can be solved in an artistic way with
-our process, for the head may always be produced in
-a rather coarse grain, so that it dovetails harmoniously
-into the sketchily treated surroundings.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Oil-Painting Style.</span>—If it is desired to prepare
-portraits which resemble reproductions of oil paintings,
-one should proceed as follows: the head should be first
-inked in considerably deeper than it should appear in
-the final print; then, if the head is on a light background,
-it will appear vigorous, even if not much ink
-is used. If, however, the background is dark and
-heavy, the inked-up head will appear considerably lighter
-because of the contrast. For this style of work it is
-best to select a warm dark brown ink. When the head
-is finished, some very soft ink of the same shade should<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_91"></a>[91]</span>
-be placed very thickly in the corners and margins of the
-picture, and this should be worked from all sides towards
-the head, which naturally must not be touched with
-the soft ink. Finally the blending of the head with
-the background should be very carefully done. In the
-lower part of the portrait the clothing should blend
-into the background in a similar manner; only one must
-take care in making the negative that no light pieces
-of drapery or accessories are used, because they cannot
-be easily completely covered. Any lighter accents,
-which may be desired in the background, should be
-made by removing the ink with a clean brush. One
-may thus make the head stand out in a dark oval, or
-attain similar painting effects. Prints prepared in this
-way ought not to be defatted, as they then lose their
-similarity to oil paintings. They must be left to dry for
-several days, in a place free from dust, until the thickly-applied
-ink has hardened.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Night Pictures.</span>—Twilight and night effects can be
-easily obtained from ordinary negatives by carefully
-swelling the bleached print so that the differences of
-relief existent in the print are only slightly brought out.
-Then the capacity of the lights and shadows for taking
-the ink is not so very different, and the gradation is
-shorter. A second possibility of obtaining the same
-effect is offered by using mainly soft ink, which, as is
-well known, adheres to a certain extent even in the high
-lights of the print; only the soft ink must be applied
-very carefully and thinly in the shadows, so that these
-do not become choked up with ink.</p>
-
-<p>In this way one may make night pictures from daylight
-exposures, accurately corresponding in tone values
-to night exposures. Previous practice has been to use<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_92"></a>[92]</span>
-either underexposed negatives or overexposed prints for
-such effects; in both cases the night effects were gloomy,
-but false in tone values, and usually without details in
-the shadows. In bromoil printing the gradation can
-be shortened as described, without loss of drawing, and
-one can simulate perfectly the short scale and mysterious
-gloom of night. If the too dense sky of the negative
-cannot be sufficiently darkened by the use of soft ink,
-its inking should be postponed till the print is dry.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Prints with White Margins.</span>—If it is desired to
-obtain bromoil prints with <i>margins of the natural paper</i>,
-the negative should be masked with clean-cut black
-safe-edges of lantern slide binding strips, or one may
-use a mask, and print or enlarge on a sheet of bromide
-paper large enough to leave unexposed margins of the
-desired width. In making enlargements the mask, cut
-out of rather thin card, should be pinned on the enlarging
-screen over the sheet of bromide paper. After
-bleaching such a print the tanned image will appear
-slightly depressed within a strongly swollen, white frame
-of less tanned gelatine. The inking is done without any
-attention being paid to this unprinted edge. In consequence
-of its strong relief this gelatine does not take
-any ink from the brush, or, at most, a mere trace. When
-the print is finished, the ink is easily wiped from the
-white margins by means of a damp cloth, which removes
-this ink with the greatest ease. The finished and dried
-print is enhanced in effect if a plate mark is impressed
-in this wide white margin.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Swelled-Grain Image.</span>—Coarse-grain printing
-in bromoil has previously depended on a very carefully
-determined relation between the degree of relief of the
-film and the consistency of the ink, which had to be so<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_93"></a>[93]</span>
-chosen that the ink was not very easily taken up by
-the film. If inking was then skilfully done, the structure
-of the face of the brush was visible to a certain
-extent all over the print and gave the effect of a more
-or less coarse and irregular-grained image. It was obviously
-necessary for the success of a print of this type
-that no portion of the image should be gone over several
-times with the brush, for, if this was done, the structure
-was obliterated and the spot in question became smooth.
-Since, also, the requirement that the degree of relief
-must be rather high for the chosen consistency of the ink
-could never be fulfilled by the shadows, since these
-always take the color easily, we often obtained an undesired
-smoothness of effect in the shadows. For this
-reason typical coarse-grain prints could not always be
-produced with certainty.</p>
-
-<p>I therefore endeavored to improve the technique of
-bromoil in this respect and to work out a grain method
-which could be depended upon with certainty in every
-case. The basic thought was that <i>the fundamental basis
-for making a coarse grain print should be a part of the
-film itself</i>, and I endeavored to prepare the latter so
-that a grain structure could be produced which should
-equally underlie all parts of the image.</p>
-
-<p>Such a grain structure can theoretically be obtained
-in the following way: if we allow a properly prepared
-uninked bromoil print, which has been brought to the
-proper degree of relief, to dry off a little and then spray
-it by means of an atomizer with extremely fine liquid
-drops, the film will again swell up under every drop,
-but only under these; and when we ink up, we obtain
-a definite grain effect which, however, only persists if
-the inking is completed before the sprayed-on water<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_94"></a>[94]</span>
-grain again dries out. Such a relief grain is not permanent,
-because the subsequently swollen portions of the
-film cannot retain the difference in swelling. This
-process, therefore, has only experimental interest and
-practically can be used but rarely.</p>
-
-<p>To make the swelled grain useful, the secondarily
-swollen points of the film must permanently retain the
-difference in swelling which has been imparted to them.</p>
-
-<p>To attain this end, I start from the fact that portions
-of the gelatine which are treated with alkaline
-solution will swell much more in a bath of warm water
-than spots which have not been thus handled. If, therefore,
-the desired grain can be applied to the film by
-means of an alkaline solution, all the elements of the
-grain will swell up more strongly in the water bath
-than their surroundings, and will therefore protrude
-above the rest of the film and thus attain and retain
-a better degree of swelling than the latent tanned image.</p>
-
-<p>The next step was obviously a practical treatment
-of the film by spraying it as evenly as possible with
-extremely fine drops of an alkaline solution. It soon
-appeared that the greatest attention must be paid to
-the type of apparatus with which the spraying was to be
-done. Any atomizer whose spray combines fine and
-coarse drops is useless. Any atomizer which is worked
-by blowing with the mouth or by intermittent blasts
-of a pump is unsuitable, for at the instant when the
-stream of air is interrupted, a certain quantity of liquid
-remains in the mouthpiece and is thrown out by the
-next blast of air in the form of coarse drops. Therefore,
-only continuously functioning atomizers can be used,
-preferably those types which are actuated by double
-rubber bellows. Only with such atomizers is it possible<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_95"></a>[95]</span>
-to count with a fair degree of certainty on the production
-of a system of uniformly fine drops. Ammonia, which
-has previously been generally used in bromoil printing
-as a swelling agent, cannot be used to produce such a
-grain, because the ammonia gas volatilizes in great part
-in its passage through the air. A five per cent solution
-of potassium carbonate has been found to be most
-satisfactory.</p>
-
-<p>The next question is at what stage of the process
-the swelled grain should be produced. Making it on
-the dry print is not permissible, because the droplets
-are taken up too greedily by the dry film and diffuse
-quickly and irregularly. The safest method of working
-is to place the bleached and dried print in cold water
-until it becomes limp, then blot it off until quite dry on
-the surface, and then treat it.</p>
-
-<p>The practical method of producing the swelled grain
-is as follows: the print, which has been swelled in cold
-water and thoroughly dried off, is placed on a horizontal
-support and the atomizer set in action; as soon as it
-works with complete uniformity, it is passed back and
-forth across the print as evenly as possible under continuous
-observation, until the whole print is uniformly
-covered with a layer of extremely fine drops. The most
-important precaution is the continuous observation of
-the print while the spraying is being done, and this is
-best done by having the light fall on the print at as
-small an angle as possible. The practical way to do
-this is as follows: the print is laid on a table near
-the window. The operator sits in front of the window
-and gets both his eye and the atomizer very slightly
-above and in front of the print. Under these conditions
-there is a reflection of light in every single drop, which<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_96"></a>[96]</span>
-makes the observation of the distribution of the drops
-very easy. At the instant when the whole film seems
-to be uniformly covered with dew, the atomizer is quickly
-turned away from the print.</p>
-
-<p>It is necessary to be thoroughly familiar with the
-action of the atomizer which is being used; with most
-atomizers the finest drops, on account of their lightness,
-fall downwards not very far from the mouthpiece,
-while others project their finest drops to a greater distance.
-The sprayed print, which naturally cannot be
-touched on the film side, must be left undisturbed for
-a certain period, which must be determined by experiment,
-for it depends, among other things, on the temperature
-of the room and the peculiarities of the paper
-which is used. An approximate idea may be had by
-considering these points: the longer the potassium
-carbonate solution lies on the print, the more the finest
-drops evaporate, while somewhat larger drops continue
-their action, so that the grain becomes coarser through
-longer action. A coarse grain can also be obtained by
-the use of coarse drops. If the drops are allowed to
-dry completely, the diffusion produced during this longer
-time results in an extra swelling of the whole film, without
-any grain effect.</p>
-
-<p>After a sufficient time has elapsed, the potassium
-carbonate solution is removed from the film by rinsing
-or blotting off, and the print is swollen to the necessary
-degree. It is obvious that much lower temperatures
-must be used for this than if the print had not been
-treated with the graining solution, for the drops of the
-potassium carbonate solution cover a considerable fraction
-of the surface of the print. The fact that the greater
-portion of the surface of the print has been affected by<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_97"></a>[97]</span>
-the spray makes it apparent that the alkaline solution
-cannot be replaced by a tanning solution, for the greater
-portion of the film would become less capable of swelling
-if such a solution were used, and therefore the latent
-tanned image would be destroyed. When the print is
-blotted off after swelling, it should show a scarcely visible
-relief when looked at by light falling from the side.
-The actual effect of the grain cannot be perceived until
-after the inking has been done.</p>
-
-<p>The prints obtained in this way have, if the treatment
-has been successful, a very beautiful grained structure
-which extends over the lights and shadows quite evenly.
-It is possible to work on such a print quite normally
-without having to harmonize the degree of relief and
-the consistency of the ink with great accuracy. Especially
-is it possible to work up any given part of the
-print as long as desired with the brush without endangering
-the structure; on the contrary, it is improved
-by this treatment. For bromoil transfer, there are the
-following special advantages: every new transfer has
-exactly the same coarseness of grain, if this is imparted
-to the film once for all. In combination transfer, the
-grain persists in spite of the fact that several impressions
-are made on the same paper, because the swelled-grain
-elements are re-impressed in the same spots, if the
-registration is accurate.</p>
-
-<p>Finally, it might be well to mention a few causes of
-failure which frequently occur in the first experiments.
-If the print appears to be covered with many small white
-spots at a certain distance apart but not in contact, the
-grain is too heavy and therefore does not take up enough
-ink. In this case, after rinsing, the print may be
-sprayed once more, carefully and not too heavily.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_98"></a>[98]</span></p>
-
-<p>Larger white spots on the print show that when the
-grain was made large drops were produced by the atomizer.
-If such drops are noticed while spraying, the
-print should be immediately placed in water, dried off
-and sprayed again. If the print shows spots of rather
-large area which do not take ink and only show irregular
-ink spots here and there, it has been sprayed too long,
-that is, too much potash solution was applied, and the
-print is then useless as it cannot be corrected. In addition,
-such a print may be easily recognized after
-swelling, for a coarse grain pattern will be clearly visible
-on the film.</p>
-
-<p>This swelled-grain process permits of very beautiful
-and characteristic results, yet, like all variations, it
-assumes a solid knowledge of the bromoil process, and
-must be practically used over and over again before it
-can be applied with certainty.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Mixing the Inks.</span>—As has already been mentioned,
-we have at our command for bromoil not only black and
-brown, but any other color of ink in various shades.</p>
-
-<p>As a rule, however, colored inks are somewhat too
-bright to be used pure; moreover, as a rule they can
-only be had commercially in a fairly soft consistency.
-This is actually no disadvantage, as one is often forced
-by the consistency of the ink to do what is counselled
-by good taste, that is to tone down the colored ink with
-hard black ink. It is not practicable to make a mixture
-of hard black ink with the colored with the knife on the
-palette, because it is difficult to hit the exact shade with
-certainty in this way. It is better when using green,
-blue or any other colored ink <i>to mix the inks with the
-brush on the bromoil print itself</i>. First one should go
-over the whole print very delicately with hard black<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_99"></a>[99]</span>
-ink and almost complete the drawing by hopping. Then
-the work should be continued as would be done if we
-were mixing hard and soft ink, merely replacing the soft
-black ink by the colored one. Then the work should
-be continued with the mixed ink; if the exact shade has
-not been hit, more or less of one or the other color is
-taken up by the brush until the desired color effect is
-obtained.</p>
-
-<p>It is immaterial that those parts of the print on which
-one has tested the mixture show a little too bright or
-too dark a tone. By going over these again with the
-final correct color these places, though perhaps only
-after resoaking, will reach the proper tone, as the ink
-in the brush and that already on the print quickly mix
-to a uniform value.</p>
-
-<p>If, in the course of the work, it appears that the
-mixture of this and the colored ink, the color tone
-adhere properly, it is not advisable to attempt further
-softening by the addition of soft black ink. By the
-mixture of this and the colored ink, the color tone
-already decided on will be altered. In such a case
-varnish or linseed oil must be used to soften the mixed
-ink.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Polychrome Bromoils.</span>—Prints of two or more
-colors have previously been made, aside from the three-color
-process printed from three-color separation negatives,
-chiefly by the gum-bichromate process, by coating
-the print successively in different colors. After each
-coating the negative was printed, usually with masks,
-and the unnecessary parts of each colored coating were
-washed away during development. The preparation of
-a polychrome gum print is extremely tedious and uncertain.
-Not the least of the difficulties is the fact that in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_100"></a>[100]</span>
-consequence of the addition of the chromate the color
-effect cannot be determined with accuracy until the
-print is finished and the chromium salts are removed.
-Moreover, as a rule the color layers are perfectly distinct
-and the color mixtures formed by their juxtaposition
-must be accepted as they happen to come. A
-correction of the colors during the work is not easily
-effected.</p>
-
-<p><i>The bromoil process, on the other hand, is in its very
-essence preëminently suitable for work in several colors,
-and offers all the possibilities which have previously
-been lacking. Without any special preliminary preparation
-the worker can apply any number of different colors
-to one and the same print at one sitting; he can harmonize
-them to each other during the progress of the
-work, combine neighboring colors by working them into
-each other on the print and easily correct any error that
-may occur.</i></p>
-
-<p>It is true that the execution of a bromoil print in polychrome
-requires complete mastery of the process; an
-indispensable condition is a perfect command of the
-handling of brush and ink. Therefore, experiments in
-polychrome bromoil printing can only be recommended
-to those who have the monochrome process absolutely
-at their fingers’ tips.</p>
-
-<p>If a negative is to be printed in several colors, the
-worker must first be absolutely clear as to his artistic
-scheme and know exactly in what color each individual
-part of the print must be executed; he must further be
-sure that the chosen colors harmonize with each other.
-He will not always be satisfied with the colors to be
-found in commerce, but must prepare the necessary inks
-for himself.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_101"></a>[101]</span></p>
-
-<p>At first pictures should be chosen which contain
-large areas of uniform coloration, and as few colors as
-possible should be used. If you are not perfectly
-familiar with the print, it is necessary to have a proof as
-a guide, so as not to overstep the outlines of the different
-parts of the image which are to be individually
-colored.</p>
-
-<p>The best way of setting to work is as follows: first
-select the color necessary for one or more of the larger
-areas of the picture, for instance green for the foliage,
-and work up these areas completely, until they have acquired
-the requisite vigor and detail. Such parts of the
-outlines as are adjacent to lighter, and hence more
-strongly swollen parts of the print, need be given no
-special attention, for color that does not belong on
-them may easily be removed again with the damp cloth,
-as previously mentioned. On the other hand it is well
-to work carefully with every outline which lies next to
-a darker part of the picture which is finally to be of
-another color. Here it is best not to apply the ink right
-up to the boundary, but to complete the inking with a
-small brush only after the adjacent parts are coated
-with their own color. If, however, such outlines are
-overstepped and the adjacent parts are colored with an
-ink that should not be applied to them, this should be
-removed with a very wet cloth, twisted to a fine point,
-by gentle rubbing. During this the print should remain
-on the pad. If the incorrectly inked portions are small
-in area the ink may be removed with art-gum.</p>
-
-<p>When the first large areas are finished, the print
-should be again soaked in water, as it will probably have
-dried somewhat, then dried off, and another part of the
-picture dealt with, with a fresh color. If the adjacent<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_102"></a>[102]</span>
-colors are properly chosen, the result, with objects which
-have no sharp outlines but merge into one another, will
-be that the adjacent parts will spontaneously blend into
-a harmonious transition of color. Parts of the picture
-which have the same basic color must not be done
-throughout in one and the same shade; thus large
-stretches of vegetation, which extend into the distance,
-should be executed in front in a yellowish green, and
-should be shaded back into a bluish green and insensibly
-into blue in the distance; such transitions can be
-effected without difficulty. If in the shadows there are
-small parts which require another color, they should be
-inked with a very bright color, which is then reduced
-by going over the whole surface at one time.</p>
-
-<p>If it is found that a mistake has been made in any
-color, that part of the print may be cleared of ink as
-described on <a href="#Page_72">page 72</a>, and the work repeated. If it
-should finally appear that individual colors are too
-glaring or that the whole color scheme is too harsh, it
-is possible to go over individual parts or the whole print
-with some suitable color, so that the colors already applied
-are improved by a slight admixture of this covering
-color.</p>
-
-<p>Such a procedure shows most emphatically what advantages
-there are in the possibility of mixing and toning
-down the colors on the print itself. As a rule, to
-tone down too bright colors, these portions or even the
-whole print are gone over with black ink, but if necessary
-other colors may be used for the same purpose.</p>
-
-<p>Thus, for instance, a picture in which there are brown
-roofs, yellowish-green foliage, a sky of a pronounced
-blue shade and water of another blue, can be made
-harmonious by going over the whole print very lightly<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_103"></a>[103]</span>
-with the blue of the sky. Thus the vegetation will lose
-some of its yellowish tone, and all other colors, without
-losing their own characteristics, will acquire a certain
-unity. If the sky parts of a picture are swollen too
-much, their uniform inking is not easy. Then it is
-advisable to ink up the sky only on the dry print, as is
-suggested on <a href="#Page_112">page 112</a>.</p>
-
-<p>Because the tonality of any color, which has already
-been applied, can be altered with the brush, polychrome
-bromoil printing affords very great possibilities. Obviously
-good taste and a sound color sense are indispensable
-requisites, for without them there is danger of
-producing the undesirable effects characteristic of certain
-colored postcards. It may also be remarked that
-the colors, after defatting, have a somewhat less pronounced
-brilliancy, as they lose their gloss.</p>
-
-<p>In polychrome bromoil printing, the choice of too
-small sizes is not to be recommended. The larger the
-picture is, the larger also are the areas which may be
-uniformly treated and, therefore, the easier it is to keep
-within the outlines.</p>
-
-<p>Within the limits of this chapter, it is not possible to
-teach polychrome bromoil printing, only to outline its
-fundamentals. The unlimited freedom which it offers will
-certainly in the course of time produce many excesses in
-color. For this, however, we should condemn, not the
-process itself, but those who have abused it. In general
-it will be as well not to approach too closely the actual
-colors of the objects represented, but to work for the attainment
-of artistic effects. We must, however, in any
-case avoid even the most remote imitation of the painter;
-we cannot arrive at the solution of the problem of natural
-colors on paper by the polychrome bromoil process.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_104"></a>[104]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV<br />
-<span class="smaller">AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE FINISHED PRINT</span></h2>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>The film of ink on the dried bromoil print after
-the completion of the brush work is as a rule not
-very tender, except where much soft ink lies on the
-surface. It is not advisable, however, to put the print
-under pressure, as for instance in a printing frame, for
-under strong pressure the ink may still partially offset
-on the adjacent paper, so that the image is damaged.
-No pressure should be applied until after the removal
-of the fatty medium, which is described later.</p>
-
-<p>When the brush work is completed, the whole surface
-of the bromoil print shows a slight gloss, caused by
-the fatty medium of the ink. The shadows show a
-stronger sheen, especially in those places where there is
-more soft ink, for soft inks contain more medium. The
-surface of the print, so far as the gloss is concerned, is
-like that of a finished gum print. But with the latter
-the gloss cannot be removed; when it is desired to get
-rid of the unpleasant property of gum prints, that the
-shadows are more glossy than the rest of the print, it is
-necessary to make the whole print glossy by painting
-it with a solution of gum. This is also the case with the
-carbon process.</p>
-
-<p><i>With the bromoil process, on the other hand, it is
-easily possible to remove the gloss entirely.</i> The shininess
-of a finished bromoil print is especially unpleasant<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_105"></a>[105]</span>
-when seen sideways, but, in certain cases, it imparts
-depth to the picture and may be made fairly inoffensive
-by glazing the print. Prints which are to keep their
-gloss must be exposed to the air for some days, protected
-from dust, until the ink has completely hardened. Until
-this has happened, the surface of the picture, especially
-where the ink is soft, is sensitive and ought not
-to be touched.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Defatting the Ink Film.</span>—Before removal of the
-fatty medium from the ink, <i>the print must be absolutely
-dried out</i>. It must be so dry that it rings sharply when
-the finger is snapped against it. Also, the dish in which
-the defatting is to be carried out must not contain the
-slightest trace of moisture, otherwise trouble will be
-caused.</p>
-
-<p>An easily volatile solvent of the fat, such as benzol,
-trichlorethylene, carbon tetrachloride, etc., should be
-poured into the dish, and the print immersed in the
-liquid and allowed to remain for some minutes with
-constant rocking. On account of the danger of fire
-from the vapors of benzol, no naked flame should be
-allowed in the room. Carbon tetrachloride (carbona),
-on the other hand, is non-inflammable; its solvent
-action, and that of the trichlorethylene, on fats, is much
-more rapid than that of benzol.</p>
-
-<p>The film of ink is, as a rule, not damaged by the solvent,
-though care should be taken with prints which have
-been executed wholly or mostly in soft ink. With such
-prints it may happen that the ink is entirely dissolved
-in parts, or that irregular sharp lines and streaks are
-suddenly formed. Soft ink prints should, therefore, be
-allowed to dry for several days before they are defatted.
-By the use of very energetic solvents, such, for instance,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_106"></a>[106]</span>
-as trichlorethylene and carbon tetrachloride, soft ink
-prints, as a rule, are completely dissolved. <i>Benzol is,
-therefore, to be preferred in all cases.</i></p>
-
-<p>The print should be removed from the liquid without
-touching the ink film, softened by the solvent. This
-evaporates fairly quickly, and <i>now the bromoil print
-has an absolutely matt surface of great beauty</i>. It is
-here naturally assumed that the fatty medium of the ink
-is soluble in benzol, which is usually the case.</p>
-
-<p><i>The solution of the medium from the fatty ink, besides
-the removal of the gloss, has also the effect of fixing
-the surface of the picture and making it more resistant.</i>
-While the film of ink before the defatting is fairly
-tender, it afterwards has a stability at least equal to
-that of a pencil drawing. The surface of the finished
-bromoil print is generally at least as little liable to damage
-as the film of prints prepared by other photographic
-methods. It seems as if the very minute grains of pigment
-contained in the fatty ink are made firmly adherent
-by the drying of the somewhat tacky gelatine
-film and therefore remain fixed even after the removal
-of the fatty medium. It is only from places in which
-a specially thick layer of soft ink was deposited, that a
-trifle of pigment dust can sometimes be removed by light
-friction.</p>
-
-<p><i>The defatting is therefore a procedure which is advisable
-in most cases and only after this is the bromoil
-print actually complete.</i> After it has been carried out,
-the image consists of pure mineral pigment adhering
-firmly to the gelatine. It is self-evident that a print
-treated in such a way is absolutely permanent, provided
-that the inks used are non-fading, which is almost always
-the case. One can also subsequently moisten or<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_107"></a>[107]</span>
-soak the print without any danger if, for example, it is
-to be mounted on cardboard.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Retouching the Print.</span>—The defatted bromoil
-print is susceptible to the most far-reaching mechanical
-modification. The picture now consists, as already mentioned,
-entirely of extremely fine particles of pigment
-adhering to the film about as strongly as the lines of a
-pencil drawing. <i>This pigment can also now be treated
-with rubber exactly like a pencil drawing. The ink, as
-far as it was put on by degrees, can also be removed by
-degrees from any desired place by proper measures.</i></p>
-
-<p>In the finished bromoil print the deepest shadows are
-formed by a comparatively thick layer of pigment, while
-the lights have only a very delicate coating of ink. We
-are consequently able to diminish the thickness of the
-film by proper treatment, removing it layer by layer, so
-that the shadows become more transparent, or the film
-of ink may be entirely removed, so that the gelatine base
-is laid bare.</p>
-
-<p>The best tool for this is a piece of a hard rubber eraser
-sharpened to a fine point with sandpaper or a file. It
-is also advisable to use a very soft sharpened eraser for
-treating very light places.</p>
-
-<p>Every part of the print which is to be lightened should
-now be gone over with the point of the rubber in fine
-lines very close together. The ink powder, which is
-taken up by the rubber, must be removed from time to
-time by rubbing the rubber on the sandpaper, or it will
-be left on the print again in the form of dark lines. If
-gentle rubbing with the eraser does not have the desired
-effect, it should be used more energetically. Sometimes
-the ink adheres so firmly that the rubber must be used
-quite vigorously in order to remove it. On the other<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_108"></a>[108]</span>
-hand, where soft ink has been applied, one must work
-very lightly, or more ink may be removed than is
-desired.</p>
-
-<p><i>Important details of the picture may be completely
-taken out with the rubber</i> without getting down to the
-paper, if the work is done carefully. Thus, for instance,
-unsharp figures in the foreground of a street scene, disturbing
-details in the background of a portrait, undesirable
-details of a landscape, such as telegraph wires, ugly
-poles, trees, etc., may be removed almost without leaving
-a trace behind. If this treatment does leave visible
-marks, they can be easily made to disappear with brush
-and ink.</p>
-
-<p>For removing or lightening tiny spots or lines, or for
-removing brush hairs and similar imperfections left during
-the inking, one may use a sharp <i>lancet or penknife</i>,
-or a steel needle set in a handle. Yet in the use of these
-sharp instruments one must be careful to scrape the
-surface very gently and carefully, or the gelatine film
-may be cut, which leaves noticeable marks.</p>
-
-<p>The possibility of removing the ink from the finished
-print in layers by the use of an eraser, without leaving
-any trace, gives the bromoil printer another means for
-modifying the tone values of the print at will. If preconceived
-ideas were not fully carried out in the application
-of the ink, because tiny places could not be
-properly worked out with the brush, or because they
-were overlooked, the desired change of tone values can
-now be effected; with the aid of the rubber, also, <i>especially
-effective lights</i> may be added to the picture.</p>
-
-<p><i>If, in the application of the ink, large areas were not
-quite uniformly treated, they can be corrected now without
-trouble. Dark spots of ink can be easily removed<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_109"></a>[109]</span>
-with the rubber, and it is often easier to even out a
-rather broken surface with the eraser than with the oil-printing
-brush.</i></p>
-
-<p>Bare spots, white points, and other defects of the
-image, or places from which too much ink has been removed
-with the eraser or penknife, are best spotted with
-<i>water-color</i> of proper shade, or in the case of brownish-black
-prints, even with charcoal. The defatted film
-takes the water-color easily and places treated with it
-remain perfectly matt; on the other hand, <i>retouching
-with lead pencil should be avoided whenever possible</i>,
-as this always produces a certain shininess, which is
-rendered particularly prominent by the dull surface of
-the rest of the print. A bromoil print which has not
-been defatted may also be retouched in the same way,
-but the parts worked up with the rubber are then noticeable.
-Filling up spots on such prints is best effected
-with oil-printing ink, applied with a water-color brush
-dipped in heavy benzol so as to dilute it.</p>
-
-<p>It is thus possible in the bromoil process to produce
-very comprehensive changes with rubber, needle and
-ink, without destroying the character of the picture.
-With some experience this work is done so quickly and
-easily that it is not necessary to retouch the negative at
-all, even with portraits. The removal of imperfections
-in the complexion or the softening of too sharp features
-can be effected much more quickly and with more certainty
-as to the effect on the finished bromoil print than
-on the negative, especially as retouching on the negative
-shows up unpleasantly in enlarging.</p>
-
-<p>The possibilities of after-treatment of a bromoil print
-are manifold. Thus, for instance, by means of the
-eraser very natural appearing clouds can be rubbed into<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_110"></a>[110]</span>
-the cloudless sky of a landscape not taken with an
-orthochromatic plate, if in inking the sky is properly
-darkened. In the background and subordinate planes of
-a portrait, a certain draughtsmanlike character can be
-attained by suitable delicate strokes with the rubber.
-Ugly lines of the hair or clothing which could not be
-suitably dealt with in the inking-up, can now be altered
-with a little skill. A dull landscape may be made more
-lively by picking out a few lights.</p>
-
-<p>Finally, it may be mentioned that it is also possible
-<i>to change the color of the paper base of the print</i>, though
-this is best done before the application of the ink. Commercial
-bromide papers as a rule are only obtainable in
-white or yellowish tints. Another tone may be imparted
-to the paper, for instance reddish or bluish for certain
-effects; this is effected by swelling the bleached and
-fixed bromoil print in a dye solution which has been
-found suitable by preliminary trial with white paper.
-The paper fibers and the gelatine assume the desired
-color and the print after soaking is removed and worked
-up as usual; this staining may also be done with
-finished prints.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Refatting of the Print.</span>—As already mentioned,
-the finished bromoil print shows on its surface places
-with different degrees of gloss, since the parts of the
-picture which took a good deal of ink, as for instance
-the shadows, are more shiny than the rest. In order to
-remove these sometimes unpleasant effects; the finished
-bromoil print can be immersed in a fat solvent, which
-completely removes the glossy medium from the ink
-film. After the evaporation of the solvent the bromoil
-print has a perfectly matt surface.</p>
-
-<p>Frequently, however, this complete dullness of the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_111"></a>[111]</span>
-surface does not please the worker, because, especially
-with soft ink prints, it causes a marked <i>loss of brilliancy</i>.
-It is thus necessary to choose between a brilliant surface
-with unequally glossy places, or a uniform matt
-surface. I have undertaken experiments to place in the
-hands of the bromoil printer a means of imparting to
-his prints any desired degree of gloss, after removal of
-the unpleasant uneven shininess. Attempts to obtain
-brilliancy by the use of ordinary varnishes failed.
-Whether the varnish was sprayed on or the print was
-immersed, there was always a certain damage to the
-surface, since the ink film, which lies rather loosely in
-the form of powder on the defatted soft ink prints, combined
-irregularly with the varnish and caused some
-trouble. I was finally successful with the following plan,
-which is a logical consequence of the nature of the bromoil
-print and the varnish inks used in making it.</p>
-
-<p>Dissolve from 5 to 10 ccm of linseed oil varnish in
-500 ccm of benzol (77 to 154 minims to 16 oz.). Then
-the defatted and perfectly flat print is completely immersed
-in this solution for one minute and hung up to
-dry. Perfect flatness of the print is necessary, otherwise
-troublesome markings are formed in drying, which,
-however, may be removed without difficulty by repeating
-the process. Irregularities may also be caused by supporting
-the print by the fingers on the back before hanging
-it up; the warmth of the fingers evaporates the solvent
-more quickly, so that spots are caused. The print
-should only be handled by the edges until it is dry.</p>
-
-<p>After the evaporation of the solvent, the linseed oil
-varnish dissolved therein is very evenly distributed
-throughout the whole film of ink; this restores to the
-ink a part of its varnish which was removed in the defatting,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_112"></a>[112]</span>
-but more evenly distributed, so that now the
-whole print shows a gloss, which is hardly noticeable,
-but which considerably increases the brilliancy. If this
-gloss is not sufficient, more varnish should be added
-to the bath; if it is too strong, more of the solvent is
-added. In this way any degree of gloss desired can be
-obtained. If it is too strong, it can be removed again with
-benzol. When the bromoil print is to be retouched it
-should be defatted before retouching and afterward
-treated as just described, so that the varnish bath may
-also act on the retouched places.</p>
-
-<p>If no retouching is required, then the defatting can
-be effected in the varnish bath, which then effects a kind
-of equalization, since the shadows rich in varnish give
-up the medium, while the other parts of the picture
-take it up.</p>
-
-<p>By the use of weak varnish baths for after treatment
-of defatted bromoil prints, surfaces of velvety appearance
-may be obtained.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Application of Ink to Dry Prints.</span>—When the
-gelatine film has been swollen to the highest possible
-relief even the very soft inks take only with difficulty
-and in consequence frequently irregularly. Sometimes
-the formation of such places is unavoidable, especially
-when prints with very great contrasts have to be used.
-We are then forced to choose a relief which permits the
-inking of the darkest parts of the print. The warm
-water, or ammonia, bath requisite for this acts so
-strongly on the slightly tanned or untanned parts, that
-an excessive relief is obtained, and then the ink takes
-with difficulty or not at all. This most frequently happens
-with skies which are very dense in the negative.</p>
-
-<p>Such parts of the print, resistant while it is wet, can,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_113"></a>[113]</span>
-however, be inked up without difficulty after the print
-has been allowed to dry. Then they are inked up with
-a brush, using an ink of the same tint and consistency
-as was used in making the bromoil print itself. The
-dry gelatine takes the ink quite evenly, and in this way
-any desired tone from the most delicate to the darkest
-may be obtained. By omitting to ink in suitable places,
-clouds may be imitated, and if necessary these may be
-worked up by retouching.</p>
-
-<p>With polychrome bromoils, when the skies are too
-swollen, one should carefully remove all areas of ink
-which project from the landscape into the sky, and this
-is also advisable in monochrome work. The best thing
-to use for this, especially with complicated outlines, is
-a water-color brush dipped in two per cent solution of
-ammonia, which easily removes the obtrusive ink from
-the gelatine. Larger areas should be carefully rubbed
-with a point of wet linen or with the finger tip wrapped
-in a wet cloth. In this way the highly swollen parts of
-the gelatine are completely freed from ink; then the
-print should be dried and the sky inked up as desired
-in the manner described above.</p>
-
-<p>The method of applying the ink to the dry film is
-valuable for obtaining other effects, as is more fully described
-in the next chapter, on bromoil transfer.</p>
-
-<p>In bromoil, photographic printing has been enriched
-by a process that can fulfil every wish of the photographer
-who is striving for artistic results. It combines
-in itself all the advantages of previously known processes,
-but surpasses them all in the possibility of general
-and local control, and especially in the fact that
-control can be effected at will at any desired step of the
-process from the beginning to the end, that it need not<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_114"></a>[114]</span>
-extend over the whole print but may be limited to particular
-parts, and that the results of the control are visible
-immediately, during the work. Not the least important,
-however, is the fact that the flexibility of the
-process enables one to immediately repair any error
-without impairment of the print. When it is further
-considered that the bromoil process is independent of the
-size of the negative, that it permits the operator to use
-any support, any structure, any grain and any color, we
-should be warranted in saying that the bromoil process
-is the process of the future for amateurs striving for
-artistic results.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_115"></a>[115]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V<br />
-<span class="smaller">TRANSFER METHODS</span></h2>
-
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Simple transfer.</span>—Bromoil prints, which have
-been inked up but not defatted, can be effectively
-used as print-plates, from which pulls on any desired
-plain paper can be taken. The process of making such
-transfers is simple and certain and opens a whole series
-of new possibilities to the amateur. Briefly the method
-is as follows:</p>
-
-<p>The greasy ink on a finished bromoil print lies on a
-gelatine film. If the inked print is brought into contact
-with any uncoated paper and passed between two
-rolls under pressure, the ink transfers from the bromoil
-print to the paper. Obviously the picture thus produced
-is laterally reversed, which must be kept in view in
-preparing bromoil prints for transfer. Bromide enlargements
-to be used for transfer should, therefore, be made
-reversed.</p>
-
-<p>The bromoil print can again be inked up after this
-process and again used for transfer; with bromide papers
-with resistant gelatine films this process may be repeated
-many times.</p>
-
-<p>The advantages which bromoil transfer offers are as
-follows: in the first place we attain the end so often
-sought of being able to use any suitable paper for making
-photographic prints, which opens a new field for
-artistic endeavor. Obviously, also, any desirable oil-printing
-ink can be used, so that the whole gamut of
-colors is at the command of the operator.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_116"></a>[116]</span></p>
-
-<p>The personal control of the tone values of the print,
-which attains its maximum development in bromoil
-printing, is equally possible in bromoil transfer.</p>
-
-<p>The picture is obtained on an uncoated paper and,
-therefore, the prints are of a character which hitherto
-could scarcely be obtained.</p>
-
-<p>The finished prints, if the paper is properly chosen,
-can be retouched as much as desired.</p>
-
-<p>From a single bromoil print a whole series of impressions
-can be obtained, which may either be all alike or
-quite different. They can be made heavy or light, in
-one or more colors, or even in polychrome, according
-to how the re-inking is done.</p>
-
-<p>The transfer process is also very cheap, as the papers
-used are naturally much cheaper than photographic
-printing papers. Moreover, one can make the pulls
-from small bromoil prints on larger sheets, so that the
-picture may be suitably surrounded with white margins.</p>
-
-<p>The following details should be observed in the preparation
-of bromoil transfers:</p>
-
-<p>The bromoil print designed to be used as a print-plate
-can be made on papers of the characters described
-in Chapter I, <a href="#Page_13">page 13</a>. The bromide paper need not
-necessarily be free from structure, for with the pressure
-to which the sheet is subjected in the transfer, the effect
-of the structure is lost. The structure of the bromide
-paper may also be reduced by passing the bleached print
-through the rollers of the transfer machine under heavy
-pressure before inking. <i>The bromide print or enlargement
-must be kept very clean and free from fog</i>, since
-the cleanness of the high lights plays a very important
-part in the transfer. The inking is done in the usual
-way; only one should use all possible means to obtain<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_117"></a>[117]</span>
-the greatest possible cleanness of the high lights, and
-good modulation. After inking-up, any brush hairs and
-especially any little particles of ink that are not broken
-up must be removed, as the latter are especially troublesome
-in the transfer.</p>
-
-<p>The process succeeds best when the bromoil print
-has as high a relief as possible. Such a relief facilitates
-and requires the use of inks of soft consistency; soft
-inks adhere to the gelatine film far less firmly than
-harder ones and, therefore, transfer very much more
-easily to the transfer paper. A simple experiment makes
-this fact very clear: if the tip of the finger is placed
-on a part of the bromoil print worked-up with hard
-ink, some of the ink sticks to the finger, but at the most
-there is formed on the print an impression of the tip of
-the finger, as the place touched still retains the greater
-part of its ink. If, however, the tip of the finger is
-placed on a part of the print worked up with soft ink,
-the latter will be almost entirely removed. This may
-serve to show why bromoil prints which have been entirely
-or chiefly worked up with hard ink cannot be
-entirely transferred to the transfer paper. The shadows
-especially, when covered with hard ink, are likely to
-appear much reticulated in consequence of the imperfect
-transfer of the ink.</p>
-
-<p><i>To obtain with certainty a faultless bromoil transfer,
-soft ink should therefore be used</i>; the softening of the
-ink must naturally not exceed a certain limit, because
-otherwise the high lights will take the ink and a clean
-pull cannot be obtained. In order to be able to use a
-soft ink successfully, the relief of the bromoil print
-must as a rule be kept rather high; hence usually
-water baths of suitably high temperature should be<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_118"></a>[118]</span>
-used. It may, however, happen, especially with contrasty
-prints, that the gelatine in the high lights becomes
-too soft, and if it is not already damaged when taken
-from the warm water, it pulls off in inking-up or in the
-transfer. In order to avoid this, it is best to use the
-ammonia bath described on <a href="#Page_45">page 45</a>.</p>
-
-<p>Bromoil prints which are to be used for transfer must,
-as already mentioned, always be kept very clean. This is
-necessary for the following reasons. In the transfer the
-ink on the high lights transfers completely in every case
-to the transfer paper, for the high lights are in the
-highest relief, and the ink adheres to them very lightly.
-On the other hand the ink is generally not completely
-removed from the shadows, as they have the lowest
-relief and, in consequence of their tanning, the ink adheres
-to them more tenaciously. Thus it happens that
-the transfer is usually somewhat shorter in gradation
-than the original bromoil. Allowance must be made
-for this, and the bromoil print should be made considerably
-more brilliant than the transfer ought to be, unless
-low-toned transfers are intentionally sought.</p>
-
-<p>In order to obtain clean, sharp edges the bromide
-print when dry should be cut to the desired size and a
-small tab of paper left at one corner, which is useful
-for hanging it up in the further processes, whereby any
-damage to the film of the picture itself is avoided. This
-little tab should be cut off just before inking. If a
-plate mark is desired, the print should be made with a
-suitable narrow white margin.</p>
-
-<p>The finished bromoil print can be immediately used
-for the transfer. If it is not used at once, it remains
-fit for transfer until the ink begins to harden.</p>
-
-<p>Any desired kind of paper may theoretically be used<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_119"></a>[119]</span>
-for the transfer; but obviously, the success of the transfer
-greatly depends on the choice of the paper. The
-finest effects are obtained on matt and absorbent, but
-strong and well-made papers, the very best being papers
-intended for copper-plate printing. As the ink penetrates
-into the fiber of such papers to a certain extent,
-they give beautiful transfers with an absolutely matt
-surface. Absorbent papers also make it possible to
-transfer almost all of the ink from the bromoil. It is
-different with sized or highly calendered papers. With
-these, the ink only penetrates a very little way because of
-the film of size. The ink, therefore, lies chiefly on the
-surface of the transfer and appears glossy in the shadows;
-also, as it is not sufficiently absorbed by the transfer
-paper, the transfer of the ink from the bromoil to
-the paper is usually not complete.</p>
-
-<p>It is advisable, when using calendered paper, to remove
-the gloss by preliminary dipping in water. Other
-kinds of paper also frequently give better transfers, if
-they are first moistened; this is most easily done by
-dipping them in water and then drying them between
-two blotters.</p>
-
-<p>Papers which are inclined to blister because of short
-fibers easily split in transfer, as parts of the surface
-of the paper adhere to the high lights of the print and
-tear away.</p>
-
-<p>Such papers may be made available for transfer, if
-they are coated with two per cent wheat starch paste
-and allowed to dry (Process of E. Guttmann). This is
-prepared by stirring up 2 g (60 gr.) of wheat starch
-in a little cold water, and adding to the mixture 100 ccm
-(3½ oz.) of actually boiling water, stirring well and
-allowing to cool.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_120"></a>[120]</span></p>
-
-<p>The blistering of weak papers must be differentiated
-from the sticking to the transfer paper of parts which
-are too much swollen; in this case the surface of the
-paper remains undamaged, but the gelatine film of the
-high lights is torn off and adheres to the transfer paper.
-As a rule, this only occurs with those parts that are swollen
-too much, when too great pressure is used in the transfer.
-The preliminary sizing of the transfer paper with
-wheat starch prevents this also. Parts of the gelatine
-film which have high relief may also be protected from
-sticking to the transfer paper by a slight coat of varnish.</p>
-
-<p>The best machine to use is that described by E.
-Guttmann on <a href="#Page_153">page 153</a>. It has proved satisfactory in
-every way, especially as it permits accurate and easy
-regulation of the pressure of the rolls. If such a press
-is not available, an ordinary burnisher can be used. The
-simultaneous movement of the rolls in burnishers is
-produced as a rule by two gear wheels. The inaccurate
-fitting of the gear teeth, however, causes periodic irregularities
-in the pressure, which cause trouble in the
-transfer. In order to prevent this one of the gear wheels
-should be removed, so that the simultaneous movement
-of the rolls is produced by the pressure alone. A burnisher
-is useful for the preparation of transfers only
-if it is possible to obtain sufficient pressure on the rolls.
-On the other hand it is difficult to obtain with this machine
-the necessary regulation of the pressure during
-the transfer, which is described in the following paragraph.</p>
-
-<p>The following is the procedure in transferring. A
-blanket must first be interposed between the rolls of
-the press. The best thing to use for this is two or four
-thin smooth cards, which may be covered at top and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_121"></a>[121]</span>
-underneath with two sheets of thin linoleum. The latter
-are not absolutely necessary. The print may now be
-introduced into the machine either by entirely removing
-the blankets, or by rolling them out far enough so that
-the middle sheets can be easily bent away from one
-another. The position of the transfer on the transfer
-paper should be marked with a pencil, and, if a plate
-mark is desired, a piece of cardboard cut to the proper
-size should be properly placed on the transfer paper,
-and the whole passed through the machine. The transfer
-paper, thus prepared, should be laid on a perfectly
-flat white blotter, and the bromoil print, which should
-be held very carefully by the extreme edges, should be
-lowered to the position on the transfer paper previously
-marked with the pencil. Any small ink marks thus
-caused can be easily worked out later. The back of
-the print should be dried with a white blotter and then
-a second sheet of the same size as the bottom one placed
-on it. The transfer paper with the print lying on it is
-thus placed between the two sheets of blotting paper,
-so that the water pressed out in the transfer may be
-readily absorbed.</p>
-
-<p>If attention is not paid to this precaution, it may
-easily happen that the transfer paper, as a result of
-partial moistening by means of water pressed out of the
-bromoil, may become wrinkled or distorted. Then the
-two blotters, with the transfer and the print between
-them, are placed between the two middle cards and the
-transfer begun. The principle of gradually increasing
-the pressure in this, which was introduced by E. Guttmann,
-has proved satisfactory in practice. One begins
-first with a light pressure, so that the transfer passes
-through the rolls with scarcely noticeable resistance.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_122"></a>[122]</span>
-Then the pressure should be increased a little by tightening
-the upper wheel of the machine, and the work
-continued in this way until a certain, not very high
-pressure of the rolls is obtained, which one soon learns
-to estimate with a little experience. One can now, or at
-any later stage, take the transfer paper with the adhering
-print out of the press and, holding one part of
-the print firmly down on the transfer paper, with the
-hand or a straight edge, lift the free end carefully, in
-order to ascertain whether any and how much of the ink
-has been transferred from the print to the transfer paper.</p>
-
-<p>According to the result of this observation, the print
-is either entirely lifted off or the transfer continued with
-increasing pressure. In this way, with careful management
-of the work, one is absolutely certain of obtaining
-the best possible results in transferring. Still, my opinion
-differs from that of the inventor as to the reason for
-the satisfactory action of the gradual increase of the
-pressure. What happens is that in the initial passage
-under low pressure the print is immediately firmly attached
-to the transfer paper, so that its shifting on the
-transfer paper, which previously very frequently occurred,
-is avoided. When this adherence is once attained,
-we can proceed at once to that pressure of the
-rolls which is the most favorable for the transfer of the
-ink, if we are sure of it. This frequently happens when
-one has already made transfers from a print. With
-still unknown conditions, naturally the gradual increase
-of pressure is advisable.</p>
-
-<p>The print, removed after the completion of the transfer,
-can be again inked up immediately or later, and
-again transferred. Naturally it must first be immersed
-in water, so that it can again take up that which it has<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_123"></a>[123]</span>
-lost in the transfer. In the new inking-up one can use
-as desired the same ink or another color, and also alter
-the print as seems best. If the bromoil print, which has
-been once used for transfer, is to be again used for the
-same purpose, it is well to completely remove any
-adherent traces of ink by going over it with a swab of
-cotton soaked in a solvent. It may then be dried and
-can be used again at any desired time.</p>
-
-<p>When transfers have been repeatedly made from a
-bromoil print, it may happen that the film blisters. This
-phenomenon is usually only noticeable when the print
-is again immersed in water after the transfer; as long
-as the blisters are not too numerous, they do not cause
-much trouble in the transfer. The answer to the question
-as to how often a bromoil print can be transferred
-depends on the resistance of the gelatine film. In practice
-it has been observed that the number of possible
-transfers varies between five and twenty-five.</p>
-
-<p>The transfer process can also be used in bromoil printing
-as a method to free a print that has been too heavily
-inked from the excess of ink; such a print is passed
-through the machine together with any completely
-smooth paper which is free from folds, until it has given
-up its excess of ink to the paper, and it can then be
-soaked and inked up anew.</p>
-
-<p>The process of application of ink to the dry print,
-outlined in <a href="#CHAPTER_IV">Chapter IV</a>, can also be used to advantage
-in the transfer process. Any bare spots on the finished
-transfer can be inked up at will, by dabbing on ink of
-any tone value with the oil-printing brush; thus the
-sky, which may not be satisfactory, may before transfer
-be wiped quite clean on the print, the outlines of the
-landscape cleared up with a brush dipped in ammonia<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_124"></a>[124]</span>
-water if necessary, and the values of the sky put in on
-the finished transfer. This procedure is particularly advisable
-in polychrome transfers, with which a blue sky
-flecked with clouds can be easily obtained in this way.</p>
-
-<p>The subsequent application of ink to the finished
-transfer finally offers the possibility, by tinting the
-whole transfer with a very delicate coating of a suitably
-chosen ink, of imparting a different mood to the picture.
-Thus, for instance, one may give a transfer made on
-white paper a faint yellowish tint; it may be effective
-to surround the picture with a border of this tint, using
-a suitable mask to obtain sharp outlines; this yellowish
-tint is only visible in the high lights, as it does not
-show in the deep shadows. In similar fashion a darker
-tint surrounding the print may be put on with ink and
-brush.</p>
-
-<p>It is obvious that the transfer, especially when fresh
-from the press, can be easily and thoroughly retouched
-with rubber, water-color or charcoal; first of all those
-places should be treated from which the ink has been
-removed in consequence of the unavoidable touching of
-the print with the fingers, or to which the ink has not
-transferred for any reason. With transfers fresh from
-the press, any places that are too dark can be easily
-lightened with the rubber.</p>
-
-<p>The transfer very soon dries. Obviously it does not
-require defatting. The inks act better on the absorbent
-transfer paper than on the bromoil print itself, as they
-sink into the paper instead of remaining on the surface
-of a gelatine film. The final result no longer resembles
-a bromoil print, but has its own individual character and
-is a product which it is difficult to compare with the
-bromoil print as regards esthetic effect. The bromoil<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_125"></a>[125]</span>
-print has a certain charm which is lacking in the transfer
-and vice versa. In any case the transfer process is
-worth attention, since on the one hand it can be of
-practical value because of the possibility of the duplication
-of bromoil prints, and on the other hand it enables
-one to use varieties of paper which were not hitherto
-available to the amateur.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Combination Transfer.</span>—In order to render possible
-the reproduction of every possible tonal value of
-the negative, I have worked out the <i>combination transfer
-process</i> outlined in the following paragraphs. The
-essence of this process lies in the fact that two or more
-transfers can be made on one transfer sheet, which differ
-so much in their quality that <i>each of them reproduces
-a different series of tone values</i>, which then supplement
-one another on the transfer.</p>
-
-<p>This is attained either by executing the two superposable
-transfers with <i>inks of different consistency</i>, or by
-<i>the use of two prints of different gradation</i> to make
-one transfer.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Combination Transfer with One Print-Plate.</span>—The
-bromoil print used as the print-plate must be made
-on a sheet of bromide paper, which reproduces the tone
-values of the negative as closely as possible, without
-showing any hardness. The lights must be clean and
-all the half-tones present; it is, however, neither necessary
-nor desirable that the shadows should be too
-dense. In making the bromide print from a moderately
-difficult negative one should use the process, outlined on
-<a href="#Page_23">page 23</a>, or developing slightly and then completing the
-development in a dish of water. Bromide prints of this
-kind are necessary because they satisfy the most rigorous
-requirements in the high lights and half-tones,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_126"></a>[126]</span>
-while the depth lacking in the shadows is produced by
-the repeated transfer.</p>
-
-<p>On the print thus prepared two bromoil prints, differing
-entirely from each other in character, are made,
-one of which we will call the <i>shadow print</i> (Kraftdruck)
-and the other the <i>high light print</i> (Lasurdruck). This
-phraseology does not coincide, however, with the similarly
-named terms which are familiar in gum printing;
-the middle-tone print usual in gum-printing is wanting
-here and is also unnecessary, since each of the two partial
-prints contains a part of the middle tones, and, therefore,
-when added together, they give a picture perfectly
-correct in tone.</p>
-
-<p>The <i>shadow print</i> is executed by inking up with a stiff
-ink, so adjusted to the relief that only the deep shadows
-and a part of the half-tones take the ink, while the delicate
-half-tones are lost and the highest lights remain
-absolutely uninked. Having suitably adjusted the ink
-to the relief, one should also use the corresponding brush
-technique, which was described as hard ink technique
-on <a href="#Page_87">page 87</a>. The use of a hog’s hair brush is advisable.
-Perfect cleanness of the high lights, which is very important,
-should be assured by the use of art gum.
-The shadows must show the full drawing, but ought not
-to be overinked. This shadow print should now be
-transferred to the transfer paper; when it leaves the
-press, the <i>registration marks</i> must be immediately applied,
-so that the subsequent transfer may come exactly
-in the same place. It may be remarked, that the matching
-of the print to the transfer does not offer the slightest
-difficulty in practice, and that the registration marks
-can often be omitted entirely, especially with prints
-which are inked right up to their edges, because bromoils,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_127"></a>[127]</span>
-in making which rather thick paper is used,
-leave a fairly strong impression on the transfer paper,
-into which one can fit the print in the subsequent
-transfer.</p>
-
-<p>At the same time it is safe to use the following simple
-registration arrangement in every case.</p>
-
-<p>When the transfer is taken from the press, draw, by
-means of a rule, two parallel lines perpendicular to the
-side edges of the print, running over onto the transfer
-paper about one centimeter or one-half an inch apart.
-Also draw with the rule a line perpendicular to the upper
-surface of the print, also running over onto the transfer
-paper. In preparing for the next partial print, the side
-lines are first to be brought into exact coincidence and
-then the upper line. This insures exact coincidence for
-the subsequent prints.</p>
-
-<p>After transfer of the shadow print, the bromoil is
-again immersed in water, in which it must remain for
-some time, so that it again becomes saturated with water.
-Only then does it regain the same size as it had at first,
-for the expansion caused by the absorption of water is
-quite considerable. If the bromoil is not left long
-enough in the water before the second printing, it will
-be slightly smaller than in the first transfer and the
-combination print will not be sharp.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">High Light Print.</span>—The inking up of the high
-light print is effected with soft ink, so as to produce a
-very thin and smooth film of ink; yet here too the high
-lights must be kept as clean as possible. Then this
-high light print is transferred by means of the above
-described registration arrangement, when as a rule the
-combination transfer is finished.</p>
-
-<p>It may happen that one has inked up one or other of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_128"></a>[128]</span>
-the prints too lightly. In this case either the shadow
-or the high light print may be repeated, but the amount
-of ink applied for this supplementary impression must
-be very carefully judged, in order to avoid an overinking
-of the combination transfer. By the manner of inking
-the constituent prints and judgment in the quantity
-of ink applied, the final result may be controlled through
-a wide range at will; one can, for instance, by emphasizing
-the shadow print rather than the high light
-print, get more contrasty effects, or, by emphasizing the
-high light print, end with very soft effects.</p>
-
-<p>The order in which the two prints are transferred is
-immaterial. In any case, however, care must be taken
-that the transfer paper is well dried out after making
-the first transfer; for it always takes up some moisture
-in the press and then appears slightly wrinkled and
-distorted. If the second transfer is made on such a
-damp transfer paper, the result will obviously be complete
-or partial want of sharpness in the combination
-transfer. After the first transfer, therefore, the transfer
-paper should be hung up to dry spontaneously, not by
-heat, as otherwise it may alter in size.</p>
-
-<p>The process just outlined for combination transfer
-from a single print will in most cases perfectly reproduce
-the tone values of an ordinary negative. If negatives
-with a very long gradation have to be dealt with, then
-the following process may be used.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Combination Transfer from Two Prints.</span>—The
-underlying idea in using two prints is to overcome the
-impossibility of completely reproducing an extended
-scale of tones on bromide paper, by the use of two
-prints, which are so made that they divide the scale of
-tones in such a way that one end of the scale is represented<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_129"></a>[129]</span>
-by one print and the other end by the other.</p>
-
-<p>Therefore we make from the negative one hard print
-with well modulated shadows and only the darker half-tones.
-This is obtained by short exposure and suitable
-development. The high lights should show no deposit of
-silver. When master of the process, it is possible to include
-more or less of the middle half-tones in this
-partial print which is intended for the shadow print, according
-to the final result desired, and this can be readily
-regulated by the length of the exposure. The fewer
-middle tones the shadow print contains, the more contrasty
-will be the combination transfer.</p>
-
-<p>The second partial print is the high light print, and
-must, therefore, be kept as delicate and soft as possible,
-and include all the delicate middle tones up to the
-highest lights. The latter may even be very slightly
-veiled, yet only so far that after swelling absolutely
-pure whites can be obtained. No further demonstration
-is needed to prove that a combination of these two partial
-prints can include the whole scale of tone values
-of the longest-scaled negative; for the partial print destined
-for the high light print-plate gives every possible
-half-tone, while the other, intended for the shadow print,
-imparts full depth to the shadows without burying the
-details, and strengthens the half-tones, but does not
-affect the clearness of the high lights.</p>
-
-<p>The combination transfer is now prepared from these
-two prints, which are transferred in succession to the
-transfer paper, the order being immaterial. For this
-an accurate superposition of the two partial prints is
-absolutely essential. This must be accomplished by
-making the two prints of exactly the same size, with
-the images in exactly the same position on the paper.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_130"></a>[130]</span>
-This may be done by masking the negative with black
-lantern-slide strips gummed on the film for contact prints
-and on the glass for enlargements. The strips must be
-absolutely straight and the slightest curvature avoided
-in sticking them down. Two prints or enlargements,
-prepared from such a negative, can easily be registered.
-The desired end may also be obtained by printing or
-enlarging the two bromide prints under the same straight-edged
-mask. Care must be taken here that the image
-occupies exactly the same place in the mask for both
-prints. This is easily accomplished with various commercial
-printing machines. In enlarging, a mask made
-of stiff card can be hinged to the easel. The prints or
-enlargements thus made should be very carefully
-trimmed along the white margins and the difference in
-size ought not to exceed one-tenth of a millimeter (one
-two-hundred-fiftieth of an inch). Further, as different
-papers have different degrees of expansion, it is necessary
-to use the same kind of paper for the two partial
-prints, and it is best to take it from the same packet.
-It is also necessary to make both prints in the same
-direction of the paper fibers, for the expansion is different
-with and across the run of the paper.</p>
-
-<p>One of the partial prints is transferred just as in the
-previous method. The registration marks are also made
-as was previously described, only the pencil marks must
-be placed exactly at the same points on the two partial
-prints, which can be done by exact measurement. With
-this process, also, the registration is not difficult in practice
-and the careful worker will find that the impression
-in the transfer paper caused by the first partial print,
-supplemented by the two lines on the edges, is sufficient.</p>
-
-<p>The inking up of the two partial prints is effected<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_131"></a>[131]</span>
-in the same way as was outlined for the process with
-one print-plate.</p>
-
-<p>Both variants of combination transfer offer operators
-with a little dexterity a wide range of possibilities. By
-suitable treatment of the partial prints the tone gradations
-can be controlled at will. The resultant transfer
-will be softer or harder, as the shadow or the high light
-print predominates; it is possible to omit certain portions
-in either of the prints or subsequently print in
-more deeply any parts which need special strengthening;
-the two prints may also be executed in different
-shades of ink, with suitable discretion, and double tones
-thus obtained. It is also possible to print in clouds
-from a separate negative. Combination transfer is
-also well suited for polychrome transfers, since it renders
-possible the overlaying of a delicate black impression
-with different color tones. Again, since all the possibilities
-of control offered by the bromoil process are available,
-an almost unlimited new field of activity is given
-by combination transfer.</p>
-
-<p>Finally, there is still another field in which the combination
-transfer allows remarkable effects. If one has
-a negative with excessive contrasts, as for instance, a
-dark arch with a vista of a sunny landscape, a satisfactory
-print can be made without difficulty by means of
-combination transfer. One partial print should be so
-made that it reproduces as correctly as possible the
-details of the dark part of the negative, in this case the
-arch, irrespective of the fact that the sunny landscape
-will be partly underexposed. Another partial print is
-then exposed for the sunny landscape, when naturally
-the details of the arch are completely lost. One may
-even go further still, since the two partial prints may be<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_132"></a>[132]</span>
-prepared from two negatives taken from the same standpoint,
-the one being exposed for the high lights and the
-other for the shadows. A combination transfer, correctly
-executed from two such partial prints, gives a
-result in which both the darker and the lighter parts of
-the negative are reproduced in suitable tone values. It
-may also be mentioned that multiple transfer renders
-it possible to apply plenty of ink to calendered and,
-therefore, non-absorbent papers, and thus permits of the
-attainment of deep shadows, full of detail, on such
-papers.</p>
-
-<p>In the various kinds of multiple transfer here outlined
-principles have been introduced into the transfer
-process which have been used in the gum-bichromate
-process and many graphic reproduction processes, in
-order to produce wide ranges of tone values by several
-printings on one print. Yet the means of attaining
-this end are novel, namely, either different consistency
-of inks with one print-plate, or the use of two different
-print-plates for one transfer.</p>
-
-<p>In my first publications on such combination transfer
-processes, I mentioned still a third possibility of obtaining
-the desired end, namely the preparation of two
-partial transfers from one print by using two different
-degrees of relief. The process first outlined, using different
-consistencies of ink with one print, is, however, to
-be preferred to the process in which two reliefs are used,
-wherefore the latter was not further proceeded with.</p>
-
-<p>The value of the transfer process has been so increased
-by the methods just outlined that it is capable of solving
-the most difficult photographic problem, and by its aid
-even negatives can be printed, which cannot be satisfactorily
-rendered even in bromoil. While hitherto the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_133"></a>[133]</span>
-transfer process was only an offshoot of the bromoil
-process it is, since the introduction of combination transfer,
-at least as valuable and in many cases even surpasses
-it.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_134"></a>[134]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI<br />
-<span class="smaller">OIL <i>vs.</i> BROMOIL</span></h2>
-
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Oil Printing and Bromoil Printing.</span>—Oil printing
-and bromoil printing are frequently considered
-as two different photographic processes. From this
-premise different conclusions have been drawn, thus for
-instance, that oil printing is more suitable for certain
-subjects and that bromoil printing is to be preferred for
-other purposes. There has also been discussion as to
-which of the two processes deserves the preference, which
-produces the finer artistic effects, and so on.</p>
-
-<p>All these discussions are, however, superfluous, for
-the assumptions on which they are based are erroneous.
-Oil printing and bromoil printing are actually not two
-essentially different techniques. In both cases there is
-one and the same process; <i>oil and bromoil printing are
-basically identical</i>. This can be proved both theoretically
-and practically.</p>
-
-<p><i>The theoretical considerations</i> are as follows: in most
-photographic processes the chemical property of certain
-substances of being changed by action of light is used
-for the production of the final image. Such photochemical
-processes only play a preparatory rôle in oil and
-bromoil printing. The production of the final image
-is here based on a physical property of the gelatine,
-namely on its innate possibility of being tanned or
-hardened. In oil and bromoil printing an image is first
-formed in the gelatine photochemically. This image is,
-however, not the final one; it is merely a means to an<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_135"></a>[135]</span>
-end. Its actual purpose is the attainment of a suitable
-tanning of the gelatine. The photochemically produced
-image is therefore removed, but in such a way that
-simultaneously with the elimination of the image, the
-gelatine which carried it is proportionately tanned in
-the lights and shadows of the picture. Only by this
-tanning is the gelatine made ready for the production
-of the final picture. The purpose of these preliminary
-steps is the production of the tanned image in the gelatine,
-which by itself is invisible or scarcely visible.
-After carrying out the preliminary processes the result is
-a pure gelatine film, which shows places of greater and
-lesser tanning corresponding to the photochemical image
-which has disappeared and which, therefore, has greater
-or lesser capacity for swelling in these places. If at
-this stage there are still chemicals in the film they are of
-no value for the further processes.</p>
-
-<p>If a gelatine film thus prepared is swollen in water,
-the untanned places suck up water, while the tanned
-parts do not take it up. Fatty inks, applied with suitable
-brushes, are then repelled by those parts of the gelatine
-which hold the water, while the tanned parts of
-the film freely take the greasy ink. The final image,
-therefore, is not formed until the inking-up of the film
-with greasy inks.</p>
-
-<p><i>This technique may, therefore, be most suitably characterized
-by the name “inking-up process.” The usual
-names oil print and bromoil print merely designate, although
-in terms which are terminologically unsatisfactory,
-two methods of preparing the base for the inking-up
-process.</i></p>
-
-<p>Oil and bromoil printing are, therefore, nothing more
-than the two methods which have hitherto been at our<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_136"></a>[136]</span>
-disposal for the production of a tanned image in gelatine.</p>
-
-<p>Both methods lead to the same result; only the bromoil
-method is by far the more complete technically,
-as is shown in the following discussion.</p>
-
-<p>In oil printing, printing is effected direct on a bichromated
-gelatine film. The chromate image is only faintly
-visible and is not easy to judge. From its nature it has
-a very short scale of tones and, therefore, only gives
-satisfactory prints from soft harmonious negatives, while
-with more contrasty negatives it must inevitably fail;
-if with such negatives the high lights are correctly
-printed, the shadows have long lost all details; if the
-shadows are correctly exposed, the high lights are wanting
-in detail. Control of the chromate image is only
-possible to a very moderate extent. This chromate
-image is washed out and leaves behind as a result the
-tanned image in the gelatine, in which all the disadvantages
-of the short scale of tones are inherent, and which
-besides this can be far less easily inked-up than a tanned
-image prepared by the bromoil method.</p>
-
-<p>The process of bromoil printing has been fully explained
-in this book; a direct comparison of the two
-processes will be made very briefly. A correct print
-is prepared on a suitable bromide paper, either by contact
-or enlargement. Through the possibility of using
-direct enlargement, the enlarged negative, necessary in
-oil printing, is done away with. The bromoil image,
-in contradistinction to the chromate image is visible,
-and can be controlled in the most varied ways to attain
-the desired artistic effect. It has a much greater scale
-of tones than the chromate image; and this can in addition
-be increased in the subsequent processes far beyond
-the possible gradation of the bromide print. The<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_137"></a>[137]</span>
-resulting bromide image is then removed by a bleaching
-solution containing bichromate, and in this way the
-tanned image is formed in the gelatine.</p>
-
-<p><i>Oil printing and bromoil printing, therefore, lead to
-the same result; but the tanned image, obtained by way
-of the bromoil print, is qualitatively of much greater
-value, for it has a much better gradation.</i></p>
-
-<p>The opinion is frequently expressed that it is a specific
-property of the oil print to give pictures of a peculiarly
-artistic character.</p>
-
-<p>It is, however, absolutely erroneous to assume that
-the same effect cannot be obtained in a bromoil print.
-As already mentioned, the tanned images produced in
-the two methods are alike, but the bromoil print may
-have a far longer scale of tones.</p>
-
-<p>The rich gradation of the bromoil print is however
-not present from the beginning, but is only produced by
-allowing it to swell in water of suitable temperature.
-The warmer the water used, the longer is the scale of
-tones, naturally within definite limits.</p>
-
-<p><i>In bromoil printing it is therefore entirely at the
-choice of the operator whether he will or will not make
-use of the long scale of tones which the process can give.</i></p>
-
-<p>If cold water is used for the soaking, the gradation
-of the tanned image is much less than that of the oil
-print or the bromide image. <i>By the choice of a suitable
-temperature of the water, the short gradation of the oil
-print with all its peculiarities can be exactly obtained.</i>
-With higher temperatures the gradation may be finally
-increased far beyond that of the original bromide image.</p>
-
-<p>If one knows and has mastered the properties of the
-tanned image produced by the bromoil print, one may
-easily obtain the same effects as with oil printing; one<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_138"></a>[138]</span>
-can, on the other hand, obtain incomparably more than
-with the latter. No limitation is imposed on artistic
-aims by the imperfection of the tanned image.</p>
-
-<p>The following shows the <i>practical comparison</i> of the
-two methods: if we have before us prints with gelatine
-films which contain tanned images, of which one has
-been produced by the oil process, the other by bromoil,
-they behave absolutely alike in the inking-up, for the
-bromoil print receives, by soaking in cold water, a
-gradation which is just as short as that of the oil print.
-<i>The two prints absolutely cannot be differentiated in
-practice</i>, and are indistinguishable, if the paper, on which
-the gelatine film is supported, or the structure of the
-gelatine, does not give one a hint.</p>
-
-<p><i>In such cases it is impossible to determine from the
-finished print whether the picture was made by oil or
-bromoil printing.</i> The portfolios of some of my friends
-furnish striking proof of this; the authors themselves
-can no longer recall by which of the two processes some
-of their earlier pictures were made.</p>
-
-<p>Nevertheless the opinion is often held that one can
-obtain pictures of much finer artistic quality by means
-of oil printing, because the prints thus made have a
-characteristic tonality and better treatment of masses.
-This opinion may be explained by the fact that oil
-printing has been used longer and is better known than
-bromoil, and that first class bromoil prints have not
-often been exhibited in public until recently. Especially,
-it has not been widely known how manifold are
-the effects that can be produced by the different methods
-of working described in this book.</p>
-
-<p>There is also another explanation. Whoever has
-completely mastered any process and has kept in view<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_139"></a>[139]</span>
-a definite artistic purpose, will as a rule find that the
-process will give him the results which he desires. It is
-now an indisputable fact that even such an imperfect
-process as oil printing has many times, because of this
-very imperfection, led to results which have been proclaimed
-as artistic. If for instance, an oil print is made
-from a contrasty negative, the process cannot correctly
-reproduce the tone values of the negative. The short
-gradation sets a limit to the inking-up, before the tone
-values of the negative are fully developed. The result
-is then certain to be a gloomy print with heavy masses.
-Technically, however, this means nothing more than that
-the high lights are not clean and the shadows lack detail.
-This does not imply that the resultant picture may not
-have an artistic effect. <i>The question is only whether
-this effect was actually tried for</i> or whether necessity
-was not made a virtue and the imperfections of the
-process called an advantage. <i>Without question, the
-worker who intentionally strives for a given artistic
-effect can attain this easily and certainly by means of
-bromoil.</i> If, however, he has no definite aim, but allows
-himself to be blindly driven on, as it were, by the
-idiosyncrasies of the process, it may happen that he will
-obtain quite another result. The greater gradation of
-the bromide print may induce him to keep on working
-on the picture until he finally obtains a print, which
-exactly corresponds in tone values with the gradation
-of his contrasty negative, which could not happen with
-the oil print. In such cases one often hears the opinion
-expressed that the special quality of the oil print
-cannot be attained in bromoil, and that a similar result
-could be obtained by any process, even printing-out
-paper. But the fault does not lie in the bromoil process,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_140"></a>[140]</span>
-but in the fact that the worker has not mastered it, and
-has been carried beyond his aim by its greater possibilities.
-<i>Oil printing is satisfactory when one desires a
-shorter gradation than is present in the negative; beyond
-this, however, it fails. Bromoil printing, on the
-contrary, permits on the one hand the shortening of the
-tone gradations of the negative to any desired extent, on
-the other hand, however, the extension of the gradation
-beyond that of the negative.</i> It offers, therefore, to the
-artistic aspirant a far greater liberty and in every respect
-a technically more perfect and therefore more
-effective instrument. By bromoil printing, therefore,
-one can prepare at will from a given negative, either a
-low-toned picture without detail, or one richly modeled
-and full of detail and vigor. <i>Oil printing does not offer
-this alternative.</i></p>
-
-<p>If, in spite of all this, erroneous ideas as to assumed
-fundamental differences between oil and bromoil printing,
-and particularly as the special suitability of oil
-printing for certain effects are still disseminated, the
-reason usually lies in the fact that many who have previously
-worked in oil have drawn erroneous general conclusions
-from their first and naturally imperfect results
-in bromoil printing. They overlook the fact that even
-the worker experienced in oil printing must first learn
-bromoil printing and then practice it thoroughly in order
-to master it. The oil printer does not bring to it anything
-beyond a brush technique, which is not sufficient
-for every bromoil print. Everything else must be
-newly acquired; especially an actual mastery of the
-technique of bromide printing, which many lack, though
-they believe they possess it. Conservative thought
-easily overvalues its own possessions and is likely to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_141"></a>[141]</span>
-show itself somewhat antagonistic to new accomplishments
-which cost new efforts. The worker who spares
-no trouble to make himself a thorough master of bromoil
-printing will be in possession of a technique which
-renders feasible, by its extraordinary many-sidedness and
-capacity of expression, the solution of the most difficult
-problems of artistic photography.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_142"></a>[142]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII<br />
-<span class="smaller">BROMOIL TRANSFER</span></h2>
-
-<p class="center"><span class="smcap">By Eugen Guttmann</span></p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>The idea of transferring a bromoil print to an
-ordinary, uncoated paper was first introduced by
-the English and later further worked out by the French.
-The Germans turned to this new process comparatively
-late, but obtained fine results. Yet the practice of this
-beautiful form of artistic photography was limited to a
-small circle of adherents, and even to-day, when bromoil
-printing, thanks to the instruction of some excellent
-textbooks, has become known to almost all artistic
-workers, one cannot state that it enjoys wide popularity.
-This may well come from the fact that not everyone
-has the absolutely necessary printing machine, and that
-the substitutes for this machine, such as burnishers and
-washing mangles, cannot bring out all that lies in the
-process. In addition, when the process was first introduced,
-the transfers were never strong enough, and
-were mostly muddy and flat. This happened because,
-in the first years of the process, strong and vigorous
-shadows were not produced on the paper. The English
-and French improved this by pigmenting the shadows
-of the bromoil print much more strongly than was needed
-for this process. They stated that the chromated film
-took the ink very readily in the shadows, but parted
-with it again very unwillingly. Thence they concluded
-that, in order to be able to transfer much ink to the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_143"></a>[143]</span>
-paper, a surplus of ink must be imparted to the shadows;
-they thus corrected the tone values by deepening
-the shadows, and contended that they produced their
-beautiful transfers in this way. I have never seen an
-English transfer, but plenty of the French, which were
-said to have been prepared in this way. From my own
-experiments extending over a long period, I doubt
-whether the depth in the shadows could be attained in
-this way, and can only assume that very important particulars
-have not been made known in the excellent publications
-on this process. A simple reasoning, without
-any trial, also leads to the same conclusion. If, for
-instance, I overink the shadows by imparting to them
-more ink than the tone values require, then I smother
-all the details in them and in the transfer I shall obtain a
-black, absolutely detailless patch. The English and
-French contend, however, that all details, which are
-made invisible by overinking the bromoil print, become
-visible again in the transfer. They thus explain the
-matter approximately as if we were dealing with a
-carbon print, in which the whole film is “reversed”
-during the development. This is absurd. A <i>moderate</i>
-overinking will obviously give better shadows, but this
-limitation is of no advantage.</p>
-
-<p>For an important advance in the direction of the production
-of vigorous shadows in the transfer we are indebted
-to the work of Hanns Benndorf, which was described
-in an article, “The Technique of the Bromoil
-Transfer Process” (<i>Phot. Rundschau</i>, 1914, Heft 9, 10).
-He used the method of printing in superposition common
-to all gum printers, since he first pigmented the original
-print in a normal manner but with weaker shadows,
-printed it and then inked up a second time, treating this<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_144"></a>[144]</span>
-time merely the shadow parts which were to be strengthened,
-and then printed it on the first transfer. The
-results were actually very good. But the process still
-required considerable dexterity; its chief difficulties appear
-to me to lie in the fact that in the second pigmenting
-it is uncommonly difficult to so bring out the shadows
-that they do not appear too deep in the final print, and
-the middle tones and high lights are thus out of tone.
-The process is very suitable for bringing out individual
-parts of the shadows.</p>
-
-<p>On the other hand a considerable advance in the development
-of the process was made by Dr. Emil Mayer,
-and this consisted of giving to the bromide print by exposure
-and development a particular character only
-suitable for this purpose. Fuller details of this are given
-under the heading “Combination Transfer with one
-Print Plate,” <a href="#Page_125">page 125</a>.</p>
-
-<p>In most publications on bromoil transfer, directions
-are finally given to pass the finished bromoil print quickly
-<i>once</i> through the machine with a <i>heavy</i> pressure of the
-rolls, and at the most <i>twice</i>. This advice has received
-my special attention, because I found that in this way
-good as well as bad transfers could be obtained; but I
-decidedly could not count on <i>always</i> obtaining equally
-good results. I noticed that things went well when I
-had a pressure on the rolls which was suitable for the
-bromoil print and the structure of the paper. Getting
-this correct pressure was pure luck. If the pressure was
-too great, then I indeed got all the ink on the paper,
-but the shadows were wanting in detail and flat; if on
-the other hand it was too weak, the shadows remained
-much too grey.</p>
-
-<p>Hence I came to the idea of so adjusting the rolls<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_145"></a>[145]</span>
-that I printed at first with only a light pressure. I then
-had as a result a transfer which was absolutely white
-in the highest lights, yet showed all the gradations of
-the bromoil print in the high lights as well as in the
-finest and fine half-tones. The shadows, on the other
-hand, were grey and not filled up, for much of their
-ink still remained on the bromoil print. Then I again
-inked the same bromoil print and printed again as before,
-but did not take the paper from the machine, observing
-the transfer by carefully lifting the bromoil
-print. It was exactly as described above. Now I
-allowed the paper (the lower part of which was still
-held by the rollers, further details of which will be found
-in the section “Printing”) to again come into contact
-with the bromoil print, screwed down the central spindle
-to increase the pressure, and passed the pack again
-through the machine. The result was highly satisfactory.
-The highest and the high lights, as well as the
-half-tones, remained as they appeared at the first pull,
-but the shadows were fully filled up and completely
-transferred from the bromoil print to the paper.</p>
-
-<p>Thus I had discovered <i>the principle of printing with
-increasing pressure of the rolls</i>. Further experiments
-led me to improve the method, and the following instructions
-give all necessary explanations and directions.</p>
-
-<p>I must remark that from the start I used a machine
-the arrangement of which permitted me to see the print
-during the printing, and with which the pressure on the
-rollers could be regulated at will.</p>
-
-<p>The transfer is not only a step toward the greater development
-of the bromoil print, it is so beautiful in its
-results that no other photographic process, with the
-exception of gum printing, at all approaches it. By the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_146"></a>[146]</span>
-transfer process, photography has made its first entry
-into the ranks of the graphic arts. No positive process,
-other than bromoil transfer and gum printing, has overcome
-the oft-bewailed shortcoming of photography, that
-there is no sun in the picture, as well as these two processes.
-<i>It is even possible in them to use as the highest
-light the pure white of the paper.</i> In this respect transfer
-still has the advantage of offering a more rapid if
-not an easier technique.</p>
-
-<p>Certainly the ordinary bromoil print also gives excellent
-results. Its whites are, however, formed by the photographic
-film, and this is its only disadvantage. There
-is, however, always a difference of beauty between a bromoil
-print and its transfer, the appreciation of which is
-purely subjective. We can accept it as certain that
-feeling in a picture printed in bromoil is attainable by
-simpler means than in the more difficult transfer. The
-photographic artist will decide for the one or the other
-according to the results desired.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Bromoil Print.</span>—<i>For every transfer there
-must be a bromoil print, complete in every part.</i> That
-is an indispensable requirement for those who desire to
-practise transfer.</p>
-
-<p>That a perfect bromoil print can only be prepared
-from a perfect bromide print is generally known. It is
-not my province to describe both processes fully, for
-that was long since done by various writers in excellent
-works. But it is my duty to give some hints as to the
-way in which the bromoil print should be prepared in
-order to obtain the best possible results by my new
-printing technique, which will later be fully described.</p>
-
-<p>The transfer printer must always keep in view the
-fact that he must prepare the way for his final <i>artistic<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_147"></a>[147]</span>
-results</i> in all previous phases of the technical preparation
-of his print. He will, for this reason, in a careful
-and well planned working up of the negative, bring out
-the characteristics and feeling of his ideal result by
-toning down or suppression of such parts of the picture
-as may be necessary, a task which has nothing in common
-with the process generally called retouching. He
-will also make the bromide print, whether by contact or
-enlarging, with greater deliberation and care than is
-used in most cases. Too much reliance in this respect
-is often placed on the omnipotent technique of bromoil,
-which allows us to carry out the most far-reaching alterations
-on the print. This can certainly be done; but
-perhaps this way is even more difficult than taking every
-necessary precaution right from the start and producing
-it correctly—in one word: creating it.</p>
-
-<p>Far too little use, for example, is made in enlarging of
-bolting cloth, chiffon, or some such open-meshed fabric
-which, according to requirements, may be used with wide
-or narrow mesh, or even doubled, two pieces in contact
-[preferably with the threads at an angle of 45°.—Trans.].
-Used with discretion, this gives valuable assistance
-in producing an artistic softening of contours and
-contrasts. The same purpose is attained in perhaps
-even greater perfection, by using the procedure recommended
-by L. Vernouille of Vienna. In this method
-of enlarging <i>two sheets of tissue paper</i>, of the size of
-the enlargement, are laid upon the film side of the bromide
-paper, and the exposure is made through these
-two sheets. It is important that the time of exposure be
-exactly determined; this is about double that of the usual
-enlargement. The tissue paper must be perfectly white
-and free from imperfections, black specks and folds, etc.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_148"></a>[148]</span></p>
-
-<p>Besides these tricks a slight want of sharpness may
-be used to give the desired effect, or also the interposition
-of ruled screens between the film and the negative.</p>
-
-<p>If it is desired that the bromoil transfer shall show a
-canvas effect similar to that of oil paintings, the simplest
-procedure is as follows. A piece of cloth is cut from a
-material which has the necessary structure, <i>slightly</i>
-larger than the size of the print, and laid flat on a stiff
-support such as pressboard. Then a new piece of carbon
-paper, such as is used in typewriting, as thin and
-free from faults as possible, is cut to the same size, immersed
-in water, allowed to drain, and placed smoothly
-on the material; a second sheet of pressboard is then
-placed on top and the whole subjected to a strong pressure,
-say between the rollers of a burnishing machine
-or washing mangle; if one has not these, then in a
-copying press. The carbon paper shows when dry the
-perfect structure of the material. If this structure
-paper is now placed between the paper and the negative,
-or in enlarging in contact with the paper, the bromide
-print shows this structure together with a very
-plastic rounded image, and a longer exposure is not
-necessary. I consider this procedure better than the
-use of the commercial structure screens, since one is free
-in the choice of the material from fine lawn to the
-coarsest canvas, while among the commercial articles
-there is seldom one which is quite satisfactory, and of
-course no such variety.</p>
-
-<p>The final size of the picture must be drawn on the
-bromide print in pencil before the bleaching, for the
-positions of the edges cannot be determined on the
-bleached-out print, especially when the bleaching is
-complete. After the bleaching and drying are finished,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_149"></a>[149]</span>
-the pencil marks should be cut through with a sharp
-knife on a glass plate, and the print is thus given the
-desired size. From this point on, one should be most
-careful not to touch the print with the fingers, except
-on the back, which can be easily done with a little care,
-by always lifting up the edge with a knife.</p>
-
-<p>It is immaterial what bromide paper is used. It may
-have any surface, be thick or thin, though thick paper
-is to be preferred. For prints and transfers which should
-show the greatest possible fineness and modeling, it is
-better to choose a smooth bromide paper.</p>
-
-<p>The prepared print is swollen and pigmented as in
-making an ordinary bromoil print. <i>It is not necessary,
-when planning to make a transfer, to produce a higher
-relief by a warm water or ammonia bath</i>, which requires
-the use of softer inks and limits artistic freedom in
-working up. One’s whole attention must be focused on
-a <i>single point</i>: the shadows must be <i>clean</i>, the lights
-<i>pure white</i>. If this condition be neglected a good transfer
-cannot be expected. Deviations from this fundamental
-requirement are only permissible for those who
-have absolutely mastered the printing technique, and
-who, therefore, can foresee the results with certainty.</p>
-
-<p>One must take into account the fact that the transfer
-process has a very marked tendency to lower the tones.
-The high lights and fine half-tones always appear somewhat
-darker in the transfer than in the bromoil print,
-while the shadows, with <i>correct printing</i>, remain the same.
-It is, therefore, absolutely necessary to lighten up the
-high lights and the fine half-tones just as much as they
-lose in brilliancy in the transfer. Obviously no description
-is of any value on this point; a few experiments made
-for this purpose will quickly put one on the right track.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_150"></a>[150]</span></p>
-
-<p>The fact that the bromoil print is <i>trimmed</i> before being
-placed on the pad has caused some nervous souls to
-be afraid that water may thus come from the support
-through the brush on to the film, but this is not likely
-to occur. The pad should be arranged by first laying
-on the glass plate a thoroughly wet copying sheet; on
-top of this a second sheet is laid, equally wet and with
-no air-bubbles between. The water is completely dried
-off the surface of the second sheet with the aid of a sheet
-of lintless blotting paper, and then one can work all
-day long even in summer in the greatest heat without
-changing the support; there will always be enough moisture
-to produce adhesion between the sheet and the support,
-but one will never carry a drop of water on to the
-print with the brush.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Choice of the Paper.</span>—The pigmented gelatine
-film gives up its ink when it is brought into contact
-with paper under pressure; from which it seems that
-theoretically paper of any quality may be used for the
-transfer. In practice the matter is not quite so simple,
-for every paper surface possesses an individual character
-which definitely influences the ink transfer and the final
-result.</p>
-
-<p>Papers may be roughly classified as rough, medium
-and smooth, obviously with many intermediate grades,
-each of which may be divided into sized, half-sized and
-unsized sorts. Whether a rough, medium or smooth
-structure is to be chosen, must be decided from a purely
-artistic point of view, and in this decision the character
-of the subject and the effect desired are of equal
-importance. It is different, however, as regards <i>sizing</i>.
-The quality of the picture frequently depends on a
-correct decision on this point. This is at once clear when<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_151"></a>[151]</span>
-we consider that unsized paper is much more porous
-than half-sized or fully-sized paper, and thus can remove
-the ink much faster and more completely from
-the bromoil print. If, for example, a bromoil is transferred
-with a certain roll pressure on copper-plate paper,
-that is, on a very absorbent porous paper, the ink will be
-quickly transferred to it, whereas a sized paper, under
-the same conditions, that is, with the same pressure on
-the rolls, will take up only a small part of the ink. A
-comparison of the two transfers would then show that
-the shadows on the copper-plate paper are blocked up
-and have lost many details, while those on the sized
-paper appear much too light, which is readily understood,
-as the porous paper has taken up all the ink, the
-sized paper merely a portion of it.</p>
-
-<p>How far these properties of papers can be equalized
-or used will be dealt with in the section on “Printing.”</p>
-
-<p>In choosing the paper destined for the transfer, therefore,
-attention not only has to be paid to the structure,
-which must serve the artistic purpose, but one must be
-certain of the amount of sizing; this latter is necessary
-so that one may correctly carry out the actual printing
-process.</p>
-
-<p>As a basic principle the worker should use only <i>pure
-rag paper</i> and avoid all paper containing <i>wood pulp</i>.
-Although theoretically it cannot be disputed that any
-paper is suitable for transfer, it is also practically accepted
-and undoubtedly correct that <i>beautiful prints</i>
-can only be prepared on <i>good papers</i>, and the artistic
-photographer should not be induced by any consideration
-to use other than the best materials.</p>
-
-<p>All the commercial drawing and water-color papers of
-all tints and structure, made by reliable firms, can be<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_152"></a>[152]</span>
-recommended. Extraordinarily fine results are obtained
-on copper-plate printing paper, which may be obtained
-in white and yellowish tints. Equally as good, and
-specially suitable for certain effects, are the Japanese
-and Chinese papers.</p>
-
-<p>The stock of paper should be kept in a dry place and
-free from dust.</p>
-
-<p>Printing should only be effected on <i>dry</i> paper. Damp
-paper is used when it is <i>very coarse-grained</i> and rough,
-as then the ink is more easily taken in the depressions.
-Such sheets are best dampened by immersing them for
-some minutes in water, allowing to drain and passing
-them through the machine between two sheets of calendered
-lintless blotting paper with strong pressure;
-they are then immediately ready for printing.</p>
-
-<p>If one has to deal with very absorbent papers, with
-which, especially in the pure whites, there is always
-danger that in spite of careful printing the gelatine film
-may adhere to the surface of the paper and thus spoil
-both bromoil print and transfer paper, the paper should
-be given a slight sizing. The preparations to be used for
-this should be those used by the gum printer: gelatine
-hardened with alum, chrome alum or formaldehyde. But
-these solutions must be applied warm and then the original
-brightness of the paper suffers. It is, therefore,
-more advantageous to use the <i>cold</i> preliminary coating
-recommended by von Hübl to prevent the sinking-in
-of the platinum-iron solution for platinotype; 2 g
-(60 gr.) of rice or wheat starch or arrowroot should
-be rubbed up with a little water and added with constant
-stirring to 100 ccm (3 oz.) of boiling water. When
-quite cold the solution should be applied evenly to the
-paper with a swab. The application must result in a<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_153"></a>[153]</span>
-slight matt gloss on the paper without any damp places
-anywhere. When dry it is ready for use. The longer
-the paper is kept after this preliminary preparation,
-the better it is.</p>
-
-<p>The beginner will be well advised always to use one
-and the same quality of paper until he has succeeded
-in attaining full command of the printing technique;
-I have already pointed out that papers of different surfaces
-take the ink from the bromoils with different degrees
-of ease or difficulty. Similar differences also occur
-with increase of pressure. When the operator has once
-become perfectly familiar with the necessary adjustments
-of pressure with <i>one sort</i> of paper, he will be able without
-difficulty to estimate the degree of pressure for
-other papers. At the start it is advisable to use a good,
-half-sized moderately rough drawing or water-color
-paper.</p>
-
-<p>It may be remarked that transfers may be made on
-silk or other textile fabrics as well as on paper. If
-permanent results are desired, care must be taken that
-pure fabrics are chosen, that is, such as are not filled,
-as is usually the case with silk. As the fillers are usually
-metallic salts, they may easily have a destructive
-chemical effect on the inks.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Machine.</span>—In order to obtain a good transfer,
-a machine is required which must satisfy to the fullest
-extent two requirements: the pressure on the rolls must
-be capable of being regulated at will before and during
-the printing, and one must be in a position to examine
-the condition of the print at any time, without danger
-that the bromoil print and the transfer paper will shift.
-By pressure on the rolls is meant the distance between
-the two cylinder surfaces.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_154"></a>[154]</span></p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure1" style="max-width: 43.75em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/figure1.jpg" alt="" />
- <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 1</span></p>
-</div>
-
-<p>The autographic metal hand press, model A, as supplied
-by the firm of Hugo Carmine, Vienna VII, at
-comparatively reasonable prices with different lengths
-of rolls, is almost an ideal machine for our purpose. It
-is shown in Fig. 1 and consists, as will be seen, of a
-massive metal stand, which may easily be screwed to any
-table. Through the center goes the lower roll or printing<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_155"></a>[155]</span>
-cylinder, which is prepared of an elastic material,
-and this stands at the same height as the two tables
-seen on both sides. Above this lower, immovable roll,
-there is the upper one, which can be set higher or
-lower as required by the central spindle, in the center of
-which is the wheel. The central spindle is so arranged
-that the upper roll can be raised or lowered by screw
-gears at the right and left, the arrangement being such
-that absolutely even pressure is exerted at the two ends.
-On the right screw gear there is a notch in the form of
-an I, which with every half revolution of the central
-spindle moves the length of one tooth forwards or backwards,
-according to the direction chosen, so that it is
-always possible to produce an absolutely determinable
-pressure. The rolls, after the setting of the pressure,
-are rotated by the handle visible on the right.</p>
-
-<p>This is the whole machine. Its dimensions are determined
-by the length of the rolls, and these are chosen
-as may be needed. One with 40 cm (16 in.) rolls ought
-to be sufficient for most work.</p>
-
-<p>It may be possible to rig up existing burnishers or
-washing mangles. Whether good results can be obtained
-therewith, I cannot say from my own experience.</p>
-
-<p>The care of the machine is very simple; it needs only
-to be oiled from time to time.</p>
-
-<p>Although this, or any other suitable machine, is so
-simple in construction, and its manipulation is so easy,
-yet one ought not to forget that he who uses it ought
-<i>not</i> to be a machine. The printer must be very familiar
-with his press, if it is to give its best. Whoever does not
-believe this should ask an etcher, who will soon tell him
-how much a good printer can add to a copper-plate print.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Printing.</span>—In order to obtain from any bromoil<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_156"></a>[156]</span>
-print one or more pulls on uncoated paper, one requires,
-besides a printing machine, also—experience.</p>
-
-<p>Before I proceed with the technical description of the
-whole process it will be as well that we become perfectly
-clear as to the conditions under which transfer takes place.</p>
-
-<p>Bromoil printing has been described as a direct derivative
-of the collotype process, and it is. This very
-close relationship, however, is merely because of the common
-property of the exposed and swollen chromated
-gelatine film, but does not extend to the method of execution,
-in which bromoil printing displays an independent
-technique. The primary difference lies in the support:
-collotype uses a glass plate as the support for the
-chromated image, bromoil printing uses paper. This
-causes a variation in the subsequent procedure, especially
-when the bromoil print is not the final result, but
-merely the means for making the transfer. The application
-of the ink to the swollen gelatine also is quite
-different in collotype and bromoil printing, and the transfer
-of the ink to the paper by means of a machine is
-done differently, all of which are based on the differences
-of the support.</p>
-
-<p>The bromide print, which is taken as the starting
-point in bromoil printing, should be made on a paper as
-dense in structure as possible; thick paper, therefore,
-is advisable, because the film remains damp longer during
-the work of pigmenting, and also because all subsequent
-manipulations are carried out more easily with thick
-than with thin papers. In the collotype process, on the
-other hand, the chromated film is carried on glass. When
-it comes to printing, it is clear, from what has been said,
-that the bromoil print not only contains the moisture
-which is absolutely necessary in making it, but also<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_157"></a>[157]</span>
-that which is in the fibers of the paper. The whole of
-this dampness is pressed out of the paper fibers and the
-film, during the printing, and combines with the ink to
-a kind of emulsion. This <i>emulsion-like mass</i> is brought
-on to the paper by the machine, <i>not the ink alone</i>, as in
-collotype, the chromated film of which holds only that
-moisture which is requisite for its swelling, while its
-support, the glass, can retain no moisture. It is also
-the fact that the amount of moisture in the collotype
-film is so small that the formation of this emulsion practically
-does not occur. From these comparisons and explanations
-it also follows that the printing technique of
-the two processes must differ.</p>
-
-<p>I have dealt with these facts with more completeness
-because it is commonly assumed that the printing of a
-bromoil print must be carried out like that of a collotype
-print, and most of the failures result from ignorance
-of the differences discussed.</p>
-
-<p>So, while the collotype matrix only gives up its <i>ink</i>,
-the bromoil matrix gives up a mixture of <i>ink and water</i>
-to the paper. This emulsion is so constituted that it readily
-adheres to the paper where it is in the finest state of
-division, but where it is thicker it is more difficult to
-made it adhere. In other words: the high lights and
-the most delicate and medium half-tones readily transfer
-to the paper under light pressure, while darker half-tones
-and the shadows must receive a stronger pressure,
-from which it again follows, that in order to obtain
-from a bromoil print a transfer equally good in all its
-tones, <i>I must print with gradually increasing pressure</i>.</p>
-
-<p>That is the reason that induced me to use a machine,
-with roll pressure which can be varied at will, as I have
-described more fully in the chapter on “<a href="#CHAPTER_VII">The Machine</a>.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_158"></a>[158]</span></p>
-
-<p>The procedure in printing must now be very accurately
-described, and takes place as follows:</p>
-
-<p>The pressure which the rolls exert on the bromoil print
-and the paper as they pass through must be absolutely
-even, at every point. In order to make the pressure
-more uniform than the rolls of even a good machine can
-give alone, it is necessary to imbed the print and the
-paper in a press-pack. This press-pack generally consists
-of two pressboards (hard, thick, glazed pasteboard),
-at the bottom, an ordinary pasteboard, a copper-plate
-blanket, that is a thick felt, and another ordinary
-pasteboard. On this pasteboard the bromoil print
-is laid, and on this the printing paper. On this
-printing paper there are now placed in order another
-copper-plate blanket, an ordinary pasteboard and finally
-two pressboards. Before, however, we pass a press-pack,
-thus prepared, through the rolls, it must be explained
-in fuller detail, which is best done from an actual example.</p>
-
-<p>Let us assume that we have a print prepared as described
-in the chapter “<a href="#CHAPTER_I">Bromoil Printing</a>,” ready for
-transfer. Its size shall be 16 × 21 cm (6¼ × 8¼ in.).
-Our intention is to print this on paper of the dimensions
-of 30 × 40 cm (12½ × 16½ in.), and to surround it with
-a plate mark. As the size of the paper is 30 × 40 cm
-(12½ × 16½ in.), the four pressboards, the three ordinary
-pasteboards and the two copper-plate blankets
-should be cut exactly 32 × 42 cm.</p>
-
-<p>The two pressboards are accurately superposed
-on a table and then the pasteboard and the blanket are
-placed on top. On the last, as already stated, another
-pasteboard is placed, which must, however, be previously
-marked with pencil guide lines, for on it are to be laid
-the bromoil, the paper and the plate-mark pattern. As<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_159"></a>[159]</span>
-we wish to surround the print, which is 16 × 21 cm,
-with a plate-sunk mark, we must cut a sufficiently large
-pressboard to impress this mark. Let us say we wish
-to surround our vertical print with a margin which shall
-be 1 cm (⅜ in.) wide above and right and left, but 2 cm
-(¾ in.) below, then we must cut the pressboard 18 × 24
-cm (7½ × 9½ in.). When we have done this we mark
-on it with a pencil exactly the position of the 16 × 21
-cm bromoil print. Now we find on the 32 × 42 cm
-pasteboard the position at which we wish to have the
-18 × 24 cm pressboard just cut (as a rule this will be a
-little above the center), and fasten it there very lightly
-with library paste or mucilage. The 18 × 24 cm pressboard
-now lies on the 32 × 42 cm pasteboard. As the
-size of the paper is only 30 × 40 cm, this will leave a
-margin of 1 cm on all sides, and this future position of
-the paper should be accurately marked with the pencil
-on the pasteboard. Extreme care having been taken that
-all the lines are parallel and the measurements correct,
-we can now place in the press-pack the bromide print
-and the transfer paper, and proceed to print.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_160"></a>[160]</span></p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp61" id="figure2" style="max-width: 35.9375em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/figure2.jpg" alt="" />
- <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 2</span></p>
- <p class="caption">A = pasteboard</p>
- <p class="caption">B = the plate-mark pattern</p>
- <p class="caption">C = the location guides for the transfer paper</p>
- <p class="caption">D = the location guides for the bromoil print.</p>
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_161"></a>[161]</span></p>
-
-<p>The marking of the individual layers may be done
-very simply and accurately if it is carried out as shown
-in the accompanying diagram. This marking of the
-layers has also the advantage that we may use it for all
-sizes with slight alterations for individual cases. The
-lay-out is very easy. The pasteboard which carries the
-plate-mark pattern is cut accurately right-angled and
-must be about 2 cm (¾ in.) larger all around than the
-transfer paper that is to be used. On this board we now
-draw, exactly 2 cm below the upper edge, a sharp line
-with ink that will not smear, such as waterproof drawing
-ink, stopping exactly also 2 cm from each edge. Then
-this line is bisected and the center point marked zero;
-right and left of this zero point we now draw equally
-distant upright lines, about ½ cm (³⁄₁₆ in.) apart, which
-are numbered 1, 2, 3, ... to the ends of the line. Like
-divisions are drawn on the plate-mark pattern, or if this
-is not to be used, at the place it should occupy. The
-bromoil and the transfer paper are now laid down with
-the help of these lines so that the upper corners are
-equidistant from the zero point, which can be very easily
-done. These location guides are also very convenient
-in combination printing.</p>
-
-<p>We now have lying in front of us one on top of each
-other: two pressboards, an ordinary pasteboard, the
-copper-plate blanket and the pasteboard with the plate-mark
-pattern and the marks for locating the paper.</p>
-
-<p>Now the bromoil print is lifted from its pad by passing
-a knife under its edges, and laid carefully with its
-<i>back</i> on the worker’s left hand. Thus the print can
-be laid down face up <i>without danger of damage</i> on
-the plate-mark pattern, adjusting it by the position
-guide before sliding out the hand, all without touching
-the face of the print. Great care must be taken that the
-print lies absolutely flat. It will adhere to the pasteboard
-without any aid except its own moisture. Now
-we take the printing paper, hold it at the upper third
-of its surface with the two hands and bring the upper
-edge to coincide with the pencil lines on the pasteboard
-which carries the plate-mark pattern, taking care that
-it does not touch this pasteboard. When the edge of
-the paper and the pencil lines coincide, the paper is carefully
-allowed to drop into position from the top to the
-bottom. It now lies on the bromoil print; now, holding
-it <i>very gently</i> on the bromoil print with one hand, the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_162"></a>[162]</span>
-previously prepared copper-plate blanket is spread out
-with the other hand over the paper and pasteboard, and
-the two pressboards are placed on the cloth in the same
-way. Care should be taken that the whole arrangement
-is fairly evenly made up, so that none of the edges
-of the boards or blankets project beyond others. If this
-precaution be omitted it may happen that the transfer
-paper is squeezed into wrinkles running from the edges
-to the middle, which may even encroach on the print
-itself. These squeezed-in wrinkles, which, if the pressure
-be great, may appear like sharp cracks, make the
-print useless. This whole manipulation is rather difficult
-to perform at first, but it is learnt very rapidly, especially
-if the first experiments are made with a damp
-sheet of paper the size of the bromoil print instead of
-the print itself, and one thus becomes expert.</p>
-
-<p>When the press-pack has been made up in the above-described
-manner, it should be taken firmly in both
-hands, so that nothing can shift, and the upper edge
-placed on the machine table and guided between the
-rollers, the separation of which must be such that they
-just grip the pack <i>without exerting any pressure</i>. This
-separation must be determined by experiment. The
-pack should then be gently drawn through until about
-4 cm (1½ in.) of its lower edge remains protruding.
-Shifting is then no longer possible. The rolls should now
-be tightened, for which purpose the central spindle
-should be given six to eight <i>half</i> revolutions. The exact
-pressure cannot be prescribed, but it will always
-be better to begin with light pressure. The handle is
-again turned and the pack drawn through the press,
-until its upper edge sticks out about 4 cm (1½ in.).
-This process is repeated four times—twice in each<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_163"></a>[163]</span>
-direction. If, after the fourth revolution, we carefully
-lift up the upper layers including the paper—obviously
-while the lower edge is still held fast for about 4 cm by
-the rolls—we can inspect the <i>first impression</i> and will
-see that the high lights and fine half-tones have already
-given up all their ink, while the deeper tones still look
-very flat. The paper should be allowed to drop back
-again gently, and then the other layers. Then the pressure
-is increased by giving the central spindle about
-three or four half-turns, as, after the first impression,
-there is little danger to either bromoil or transfer through
-heavier pressure, and the pack is again passed through
-the rolls, but only twice, once in each direction. If the
-print is now examined again it will be found that
-the full half-tones and the lighter shadows are already
-transferred, but that the deep shadows do not appear
-in full tones. Then the printing is repeated with still
-greater roll pressure, three or four more half-turns of
-the central spindle; again the pack should only go twice
-through the rolls. Another examination should now
-show the print in full vigor in all its details. If, however,
-it should happen, especially when using rough
-papers, that the shadows do not yet appear quite deep
-enough, one should print again twice with increased pressure.
-All the ink which was on the bromoil print will
-now be transferred to the paper; if the printing
-was carried out properly the bromoil will look as if it
-had not been pigmented at all.</p>
-
-<p><i>It should never be forgotten that the rolls ought never
-to be so strongly screwed down that they can only be
-started by great effort; they must always move easily,
-and with little muscular effort.</i> <i>Repeated slow</i> passage
-of the press-pack through <i>moderately tightened rollers</i><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_164"></a>[164]</span>
-is always <i>more advantageous than a single printing
-under very heavy pressure</i>.</p>
-
-<p>Heavy pressure not only endangers the bromoil, since
-the gelatine film, especially in the lights, adheres to the
-paper and tears when removed, but the transfer also,
-because the water, pressed out quickly and with great
-force, is deposited in the ink in the form of fine globules.
-After evaporation, which takes place very quickly, these
-places show curious, light, circular or elliptical spots,
-which produce the general impression of a picture
-painted in the pointillist manner—an undesired effect
-which, however, may occasionally be satisfactory.</p>
-
-<p>It is very advisable to turn back the central spindle
-before finally taking the press-pack out of the machine,
-as otherwise one may uselessly and prematurely ruin
-the components of the press-pack.</p>
-
-<p>The bromoil can be immediately immersed in water
-and again pigmented—as was done at first, or with
-different ink. This process may be repeated until the
-paper breaks down, with careful treatment in printing
-and suitable stout bromide paper, up to twenty times.</p>
-
-<p>If the pressure of the rolls was too great, then the film
-shows blisters, which at first, and if they only appear
-here and there, are harmless, even when they occur on
-important parts of the print. If their number increases,
-however, it is better to make a new bromoil.</p>
-
-<p>If the bromoil is to be kept for future work, then it
-should be allowed to become bone dry, in order to dissolve
-off any grease with benzol or other solvent, exactly
-as is done with a bromoil print in defatting. Prints thus
-treated can be used again after any lapse of time.</p>
-
-<p>This method of printing is proper for either monochrome
-or polychrome impressions.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_165"></a>[165]</span></p>
-
-<p>In conclusion the fact may be mentioned—first published
-in France, I believe—that bromoil prints, which
-in the course of making have been soaked in ammonia
-water, can be more easily transferred, and that there is
-less danger of the bromoil print and the paper sticking
-together, even with very strongly absorbent papers.</p>
-
-<p>Robert Demachy has stated that transfers can also
-be prepared by removing the ink, not by a press, but
-with a solvent, such as benzol, by moistening the paper
-with this solvent and then bringing it into contact with
-the pigmented bromoil. My experiments in this direction
-could not be brought to a conclusion, as at the time I
-undertook them a suitable solvent was not available. I
-had only succeeded in determining that it is very important
-that the bromoil print should be allowed to dry
-thoroughly—from six to eight hours—and that then
-a less volatile solvent than benzol, such as heavy benzine,
-or best of all, gasoline or petroleum ether, can be used.
-If the bromoil print is laid on a sheet of paper and
-moistened with this, then pressure in a printing frame
-is sufficient in order to obtain a transfer. A machine is
-not required.</p>
-
-<p>The pictures which I have obtained in this way have
-not been satisfactory, up to the present time; the
-cause of the failure obviously was that I lacked experience
-as to the necessary degree of moistening and
-the duration of contact. As stated, for lack of materials,
-I was obliged to discontinue experiments.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Combination Transfer.</span>—The process just described
-permits the transfer of all that was in the bromide
-print. If, however, it is a question of improving
-the inadequate gradation of a bromide print from a
-long-scale negative, we must use other means. Bromide<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_166"></a>[166]</span>
-paper has only a limited scale of tones and therefore
-cannot reproduce the full modulation of a negative of
-full gradation. If the details in the shadows are to be
-retained in such a case, then the high lights will appear
-bare; if well-modeled high lights are desired, then we
-risk blocked-up shadows.</p>
-
-<p>This difficulty has been largely overcome by Dr. Emil
-Mayer, by the introduction of a combination printing
-process for bromoil transfer, of which full details will
-be found on <a href="#Page_125">page 125</a>. He starts from the above-mentioned
-fact that bromide paper does not reproduce the
-whole scale of tones of the negative, when this is too
-long, and therefore divides the tones of the negative
-into two parts by exposing one bromide print only for the
-shadows and the adjacent half-tones, and a second
-merely for the high lights and the lighter half-tones.
-He then transfers these two constituent prints in superposition
-and thus obtains the full gradation of the negative.
-It is thus possible therefore to lengthen the scale
-of tones <i>of the negative</i>. If, however, it is merely desired
-to extend the scale of tones of <i>the bromide print</i>,
-then it is sufficient to make the combination transfer
-from one print only, which must, however, be prepared
-in a way differing slightly from the usual.</p>
-
-<p>I will not repeat here the theory of the two kinds of
-combination transfer, which may be found in an earlier
-chapter by Dr. Mayer (<a href="#Page_125">page 125</a>), but in giving my
-own instructions for the practical performance of the
-process, I have essentially adhered also to Dr. Mayer’s
-instructions, with his full permission.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Combination Printing from Two Bromoils.</span>—It
-has frequently been pointed out in the literature of the
-gum process that the best positive transparencies may<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_167"></a>[167]</span>
-be obtained from a <i>long-scale</i> negative by making <i>two</i>
-positives from the one negative and then bringing these
-two positives into superposition; for this combination,
-one positive must be <i>fully exposed</i> and <i>developed
-soft</i>, the second, on the other hand, kept <i>hard</i> by a <i>very
-short exposure</i> and <i>full development</i>. If these two positives
-are laid film to film, “there is obtained,” as von
-Hübl wrote as early as 1898, <i>in applying this method
-to gum printing</i> (see Eder, <i>Das Pigmentverfahren, der
-Gummi-, Oel- und Bromöldruck</i>, Halle, 1917), “a
-result which often surpasses, in truth and fidelity to the
-original, a normal print from the negative. In such a
-combined print the high lights are derived from the
-short, the shadow details from the long-scale negative;
-the two images supplement each other and reciprocally
-increase the brilliancy. It is also possible to make good
-defects in the negative or the printing process.”</p>
-
-<p>This same principle is used in our process, although
-not exactly as in gum printing. The process itself is
-not difficult. It is necessary to make two perfectly
-registered bromide prints, which is most easily done by
-always placing the printing frame in the same position
-in filling, as for instance by fitting the same two sides
-into a rigid iron angle fastened on a drawing board, or,
-in enlarging, by using a right angled piece of strong,
-black card glued to the enlarging easel, and fitting the
-paper into this angle. I have prepared a simple and
-absolutely certain arrangement for securing registering
-prints by having a beveled-edge rectangle cut out of
-sheet iron 2 mm (⅟₁₈ in.) thick, the opening being somewhat
-smaller than the bromide paper. Thus, for
-instance, for 24 × 30 cm (9½ × 12 in.) paper, the cut-out
-is only 23 × 29 cm (9⅟₁₆ × 11⅜ in.). <i>Care must be<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_168"></a>[168]</span>
-taken in this work, however, that the bromide paper
-for both prints is taken from the same packet</i>, since only
-identical papers expand absolutely equally in the baths
-and contract equally in drying. Although the paper
-used by the manufacturer may be of the same quality,
-yet it may not always be handled exactly the same in
-coating, so that a registration of the prints may not be
-possible when one uses paper prepared at different times.</p>
-
-<p>The <i>first</i> print is now <i>very fully</i> exposed and developed
-soft, just long enough so that the high lights and
-upper half-tones are well brought out. When this is attained,
-development is stopped <i>without paying attention
-to the shadows</i>, which will be full of detail, but weak.</p>
-
-<p>The second print is exposed as briefly as is required
-for the perfect reproduction of the shadows, with the
-use of a hard-working developer. As soon as the shadows
-appear in full depth, the print should be rinsed and
-fixed. The print then shows, besides the shadows, only
-the transition into the half-tones. It is not easy to give
-more accurate instructions for the preparation of the
-bromide prints, as the work must be carried out differently
-according to the negative. Only, <i>as a hint</i>, and
-nothing more, it may be stated that in a print where exposure
-of about twelve seconds was required for the
-complete printing of the high lights and half-tones, the
-shadow print needed only about three seconds, or about
-one-fourth the exposure. This ratio obviously alters in
-accordance with the depth and quality of the shadows
-in the negative, and must be left to the feeling and experience
-of the worker. When the two prints have been
-developed, fixed, washed and dried, they should be
-tested for equality of size by measurement with a millimeter
-scale. Then rule pencil lines around the edges<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_169"></a>[169]</span>
-of the prints very exactly, and treat them in the usual
-way in the bleaching bath, the second fixing and washing.
-When thoroughly dry the pictures should be cut
-along the pencil lines with absolute accuracy, and their
-registration again tested. It is advisable to write on
-the back before bleaching “high light print” and
-“shadow print.”</p>
-
-<p>Pigmenting is effected as usual. Practically, one
-should always begin with the <i>high light print</i>, as this
-is intended to give the finest modeling in the high lights
-and half-tones, while the shadows are treated so that
-they show all the details, but no depth. This order of
-working leaves one absolutely free in the treatment of
-the fine tones, independent of the depth of the shadows.
-These depths are produced in the transfer in any desired
-strength by means of the second bromoil. If,
-however, the work is started in the reverse way, by
-printing the shadows first, then the half-tones and high
-lights must be adjusted to the existing depth, which
-may produce a dislocation of the tone values, even to a
-destruction of the whole desired effect. The best way
-is therefore to direct the whole attention in the first
-place to the lighter parts of the picture, and to suit the
-shadows to these.</p>
-
-<p>When the <i>high light print</i> is completed as desired, the
-transfer may be made. The bromoil print is placed on
-the location guides, described in the previous chapter
-on “Printing.” Then the transfer paper is placed on
-its guide and pencil lines very carefully drawn across
-the edges of the back, on to the pasteboard. Then it is
-printed. The picture will now appear in full beauty as
-regards the lighter tones, but obviously as a whole will
-be flat, since the shadows are grey and without depth.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_170"></a>[170]</span></p>
-
-<p>Now we proceed to the working up of the shadow
-print, which when complete should appear absolutely
-bare of high lights and <i>light</i> half-tones. No protective
-measures to prevent the sticking of the non-pigmented
-parts to the transfer paper are necessary, as these white
-portions of the shadow print are already covered from
-the first transfer. The print is now placed exactly
-on the marks made on the plate-mark pattern before
-the first transfer, the first transfer also brought into
-the same position by the marks on its back and their
-prolongations, which is very simple in practice, and is
-then printed. The transfer now shows the full gradation
-of the negative, or the sum of the gradations of the two
-bromide prints, which, however, will be enhanced in
-effect by the plastic softness produced by the double
-printing. If it should be necessary to strengthen any
-part of the print, to deepen any shadow, we can again
-pigment the necessary portion of the proper bromoil
-and transfer it to the picture by a third printing, for it
-is thoroughly practicable to superimpose as many impressions
-as may appear necessary from an artistic
-standpoint.</p>
-
-<p>This method of combination printing from two bromoils
-is the best attainable result in the present state
-of the art, but contains also the germ of future developments,
-especially as regards color photography, which
-problem appears to me to be most easily solvable in
-this, purely artistic, way. Only it is necessary to find
-an artist who can conduct the various printings with
-such fine color sense that the final result will actually
-produce the impression of a <i>work of art</i> in color, not that
-of a colored photograph, which has unfortunately
-hitherto been the case with all experiments in this direction.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_171"></a>[171]</span>
-This is obviously nothing more than a hope for
-the future. For the present we must content ourselves
-with what has actually been attained, which is no more
-and no less than to bring us close to our aim, ability to
-consider and use the photographic plate merely as a
-foundation for our graphic art.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Combination Printing with One Bromoil.</span>—It is
-frequently not easy to reproduce perfectly in the transfer
-the whole scale of tones present in a given bromide
-print; or at least in many cases a high degree of skill
-must be employed. It is consequently often very much
-simpler to make <i>two transfers</i> from the <i>same</i> bromoil,
-one being inked up for the light parts, while the other
-is used to fill out and deepen the shadows.</p>
-
-<p>The practical execution of the process is as follows:
-the bromide print is swollen in the normal way and pigmented
-with a <i>soft ink</i> suitable for the high lights,
-the shadows being very lightly inked. The transfer obtained
-from this bromoil print shows all the details in
-the high lights, with grey shadows. The print is now
-immersed in cold water to swell again and then inked
-up with a <i>hard ink</i>, so that only the shadows and the
-adjacent half-tones are fully worked up. This print
-is now transferred to the same paper, so that a transfer
-is obtained in which the scale of tones of the bromide
-print is considerably lengthened.</p>
-
-<p>A second method of making two transfers from one
-bromoil is first to swell it normally, then ink up thoroughly
-and transfer. It is then highly swollen with
-ammonia and the shadows only treated with hard ink.
-The result of the second transfer on the first one is
-again full gradation in the print. This method, however,
-is not very advisable, as the print cannot be used<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_172"></a>[172]</span>
-again if the second transfer is not successful. It is better
-to adhere to the first method, and preferable to use two
-inks of different consistency rather than two differing
-degrees of relief.</p>
-
-<p>If, however, the combination transfer from a single
-bromoil is to give the best possible gradation, the exposure
-and development of the bromide print must be
-properly done, the process being essentially that of
-Benndorf, referred to on <a href="#Page_143">page 143</a>.</p>
-
-<p>The bromide print must be fully exposed and developed
-very soft; the image then seems flat, and yet every
-gradation of tone present in the negative is actually
-shown in the bromide print. If a print thus prepared
-is treated with inks of two consistencies, the best results
-are obtained.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Value of Combination Printing.</span>—With the
-aid of combination transfer it is possible to solve problems
-in the bromoil printing process, which were hitherto
-unsolvable, and Dr. Mayer correctly remarks at the end
-of his treatise: “The transfer process has advanced to
-the first place and in future in the hands of the expert,
-bromoil printing is likely to be considered as a process
-of secondary importance.”</p>
-
-<p>I was early convinced that transfer would replace
-bromoil printing and am absolutely of the opinion that
-combination transfer will do its share in making my
-opinion universal. Still I do not believe that it is necessary
-to use combination printing in all cases. I would
-especially warn the beginner against using it exclusively;
-he should rather endeavor to make simple transfers
-starting from a perfect bromide and a perfect bromoil
-print, for by this means he will attain much more certainty
-in printing technique. Only when he has absolutely<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_173"></a>[173]</span>
-mastered this technique, should he begin experiments
-in combination transfer from one bromoil.</p>
-
-<p><i>Every worker should endeavor to use the technique
-of combination transfer for the execution of an artistic
-idea, rather than for overcoming technical difficulties in
-single transfer.</i></p>
-
-<p>Then it will, however, always give excellent results.
-Aside from the solution of such problems as views from
-a dark space into a brilliantly lighted distance, or pictures
-of falling water in conjunction with its dark surroundings,
-etc., it will be especially useful to the portraitist
-in treating his backgrounds.</p>
-
-<p>Combination transfer from two originals will, however,
-be most valuable artistically, when there is a question
-of combining sharply defined parts of a picture with
-softer parts. Thus, for instance in a landscape, we may
-make a sharp print and, by the use of bolting cloth,
-one with soft outlines; the parts which it is desired to
-emphasize will be worked up on the former and artistic
-softening added from the latter.</p>
-
-<p>Briefly, the possibilities are so many that they
-can hardly be indicated, not to speak of describing them
-in full. This is, besides, hardly necessary, for the
-worker who has reached full mastery of combination
-transfer is necessarily so far advanced artistically, that
-he will find out for himself all that is necessary.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Retouching and Working Up.</span>—A good bromide
-print can only be prepared from a good negative. So
-says the expert bromide printer. The bromoil printer
-<i>requires</i> a faultless bromide print as the fundamental
-condition. The transferrer, finally, will not use an imperfect
-bromoil print for transfer.</p>
-
-<p>I belong to the school which would produce a photographic<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_174"></a>[174]</span>
-picture only by purely photographic means,
-without, however, being too orthodox; I would not,
-therefore, repeat the whole laborious making of a bromoil
-print, because I might not think it photographic
-to spot out with water-color a small spot the size of a
-pin’s head, or to remove a small particle of ink with the
-etching knife. This is actually not retouching, but there
-are people who consider these changes as such.</p>
-
-<p>By retouching I mean the justly condemned excessive
-“working up” of a <i>positive</i> print, that is a change
-of values on the finished print. That should not be done.</p>
-
-<p>Bromoil printing is still that exquisite process which
-permits the correction of false tones, the suppression of
-undesirable and the emphasis of the most characteristic
-details in the most extensive way <i>during the work</i>.</p>
-
-<p>I consider it objectionable to leave all faults which occur
-during the long process of picture making, for the sake
-of convenience, to be improved on the positive print.
-But if it does become necessary to use retouching on the
-transfer, it can be done with a soft eraser. An excellent
-means of working up larger areas has been described
-by Dr. Mayer (see <a href="#Page_123">page 123</a>), which consists in working
-on the transfer with the same brush and the same
-ink as was used in making the bromoil. Thus clouds
-may be imitated by pigmenting the white surface and
-then working in the clouds with the eraser, etc.</p>
-
-<p>Since, however, this and other improvements can be
-carried out, not only as well, but even better on the
-bromoil print itself, it is advisable to do so much with
-the brush that nothing remains to be done on the transfer.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Drying.</span>—As soon as the transfer leaves the press,
-it is finished, but as the ink is very easily smeared it is
-advisable to leave it exposed to the air for two or three<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_175"></a>[175]</span>
-days. After the lapse of this time the ink has usually
-hardened.</p>
-
-<p>Very heavily inked prints require from eight to ten
-days to dry and may be considered as absolutely dry
-when the oily sheen which can be seen immediately after
-printing, especially in the shadows saturated with ink,
-is replaced by a velvety, perfectly matt surface.</p>
-
-<p>Retouching can be begun about one or two hours after
-it has left the machine.</p>
-
-<p>A transfer should not be mounted, for it looks best
-as it is, if the margin is sufficiently large.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Conclusion.</span>—The technical difficulties of making
-a good transfer are not small, and to overcome them
-requires a certain degree of skill in the worker, which
-other processes do not require to an equal degree. By
-“workers” I mean especially amateurs, not those professionally
-skilled in the graphic arts. After overcoming
-these difficulties, caused chiefly by the materials,
-there is a certain feeling of satisfaction in having actually
-produced a work of art. By using the different
-techniques of bromoil printing: soft ink, hard ink,
-sketch, and coarse grain, one can obtain transfers of
-such beauty as may confidently be said can be attained
-by no other process. There is unlimited possibility of
-variation; and this alone assures the bromoil transfer
-process preëminence over any other method of printing.</p>
-
-<p>That a transfer can be used as a basis for working up
-with pastel and water-color need only be incidentally
-mentioned, because such work is outside of pure photography
-and it is unnecessary to express an opinion as to
-the artistic value of such productions in this place. The
-photographer should always adhere to the fundamental
-law: Do not forsake photographic methods.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_176"></a>[176]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII<br />
-<span class="smaller">THE PREPARATION OF BROMOIL INKS</span></h2>
-
-<p class="center"><span class="smcap">By Eugen Guttmann</span></p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>Everyone who devotes himself to the higher aims
-of photography, and studies the works of painters,
-must learn to see with the artist’s eye if he will apply
-his knowledge in pictorial presentation of his subjects.
-In the same way the bromoil printer should become more
-familiar with the working tools of the painter, and especially
-with the most valuable material at his command,
-the ink, than has hitherto been the case.</p>
-
-<p>When we look back on the history of painting, we
-note the often-mentioned fact that not only the old
-masters of all schools, Italian, German and Dutch, but
-also the later generations till about the middle of the
-last century, ground their own colors. They did this
-not merely to be assured of the most perfect purity and
-thus absolute permanency, but also because they wanted
-to obtain the greatest possible brilliancy.</p>
-
-<p>As regards the purity of the materials used—the colors
-and the mediums—there is no doubt that to-day,
-thanks to the high perfection of manufacturing methods,
-this can usually be depended upon; but as regards the
-brilliancy, no positive instructions of any kind for obtaining
-this have come down to us. The painters took
-their secrets with them to the grave. But as the result
-of exhaustive research, together with advances in the
-manufacture of colors, we can assume with some certainty<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_177"></a>[177]</span>
-that the masters of past times attained <i>vigor in
-their colors</i> chiefly <i>by the finest possible grinding of the
-colors and by a relatively small addition of medium</i>. “<i>It
-may sound paradoxical</i>,” says Professor Th. Petruscheffsky
-in one of his treatises on the technique of painting,
-“<i>but it is, however, true, that in oil painting oil should
-be avoided as much as possible</i>.”</p>
-
-<p>The old masters knew this and acted accordingly,
-and the modern manufacturer also knows it, and replaces
-<i>any excessive quantity</i> of oil in the medium, which is
-mixed with the pigments to bring them into a paintable
-form, by other substances, for instance turpentine, and
-certain resin solutions, which have no binding properties;
-during the work these substances evaporate and leave
-behind the color with very little medium.</p>
-
-<p>These facts the bromoil printer must know, for he
-should also use colors from which he can get the very
-best possible results.</p>
-
-<p>The ink is one of the most important parts of his
-equipment. This fact was fully recognized by English,
-French, and German manufacturers, and inks were obtainable
-that left nothing to be desired. At the outbreak
-of the war the position of affairs was immediately
-altered. It was not possible to use English and French
-sources of supply and the German supply gradually
-failed. What was furnished as ink for the oil process
-was suitable for anything else but that—a soft, smeary
-and smearing mess, which did not permit any finer working
-up of the picture, and required so high a relief that
-individuality in the work was excluded.</p>
-
-<p>These conditions induced me to try and prepare the
-necessary inks myself, and after many trials and exhaustive
-experimental study of the manufacture of artist<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_178"></a>[178]</span>
-oil colors I finally succeeded in reaching my goal.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Inks and Brushes.</span>—My starting point was a
-great desire to make a <i>hard ink</i>, since I recognized that
-this consistency was the necessary starting point to be
-able to use any degree of relief. I further desired to
-attain a mixture of color and medium which should be
-as perfectly homogeneous and as fine as possible, and
-moreover to provide a palette, which should not only
-satisfy all requirements of the bromoil printer, but also
-give him only fast colors, perfectly suitable for the transfer
-process and soluble in benzol.</p>
-
-<p>Command of a <i>hard ink—which can be suitably softened
-to meet any need</i>—is very necessary to the bromoil
-printer, if <i>clean shadows</i> are to be obtained. As
-already mentioned, it has long been known among
-painters that the colors appear purer and more luminous
-when they contain as little medium as possible. In order
-to be able to apply such stiffly ground colors, the painters
-use bristle brushes, which do not produce the same
-results as hair brushes. Naturally there is nothing to
-prevent the bromoil printer from using <i>bristle brushes</i>,
-only they must fulfil certain requirements. The literature
-of bromoil printing gives many hints on this point,
-but I have not been able to locate a practical use of
-these brushes. Some years ago I had made, by a manufacturer
-who makes excellent hair brushes for our process,
-bristle brushes in stag’s foot shape. The result was
-extraordinarily gratifying. These brushes do not drop
-their bristles nor do they suffer from the troublesome
-breaking off of the points, they do not pick up the dust
-and do not smear even when very soft inks are used, because
-the bristles, unlike hairs, do not cling together.
-They can be easily and thoroughly cleaned and are obviously<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_179"></a>[179]</span>
-very lasting, and in addition cost only a fraction
-of what must be paid for really good hair brushes.</p>
-
-<p>As regards the size one is not limited, as with the
-hair brushes, to small sizes, since the hog’s bristle
-brushes can be made of any desired diameter, even 10,
-15 or 20 cm or more (4, 6 or 8 inches or more) so that
-the working up of large prints is considerably facilitated.</p>
-
-<p>Two conditions must, however, be carefully observed
-for good results. First, these brushes must actually be
-made from the <i>very finest cut</i> bristles and, before they
-are used, they must be <i>repeatedly and very thoroughly
-cleaned</i>, because they are very dirty when purchased.</p>
-
-<p>The principal advantage of these brushes is that they
-<i>enable one to use considerably harder inks</i> than is possible
-with hair brushes, which results in <i>much greater
-clearness of the shadows</i>. When this clearness of the
-shadows is obtained, one can always use a hair brush
-for working up the finer half-tones and high lights. This
-is, however, not necessary, at least in the majority of
-cases.</p>
-
-<p>I have <i>not</i> noticed any disadvantage in the use of
-these brushes; the gelatine has never been pierced, even
-in the highest reliefs.</p>
-
-<p>Although I am averse to anything that may smack of
-advertising, yet I will state here the source of these
-brushes, because the expert manufacture of these tools,
-so important in our handicraft, is not found everywhere
-in equal perfection, and because I believe that it will be
-of considerable service to those wanting brushes. The
-brush manufacturer is Magnus Bühler, Wien VII,
-Breitegasse 4, Austria.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp30" id="figure3" style="max-width: 12.5em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/figure3.jpg" alt="" />
- <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 3</span></p>
-</div>
-
-<p>I might add a word here as to the cleaning of brushes
-in general, whether hair or bristle. It is usually recommended<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_180"></a>[180]</span>
-to wash out the ink with benzol or similar
-solvent, carbon tetrachloride, trichlorethylene, etc. A
-really thorough washing is never obtained with these;
-and the brushes almost always give up a greater or lesser
-quantity of small particles of ink to the new print when
-used again. The following process is much better. The
-brush to be cleaned should be dipped into lukewarm
-water and then rubbed firmly on a piece of ordinary
-soap (soft soap is better), so that it takes up as much
-soap as possible. Then the soap should be worked up
-into a lather on the palm of the hand and washed off.
-If this is repeated a second time and the brush is then<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_181"></a>[181]</span>
-rinsed two or three times in lukewarm water, repeatedly
-changed, the brush will be far cleaner than can be obtained
-in any other way. After it has been well rinsed
-and shaken out it should be put into its tube and hung
-up by the handle in a place free from dust to dry (see
-Fig. 3). This vertical position has the effect of facilitating
-the draining of the moisture from the quill base,
-where it otherwise collects. Any brush thus treated
-will be dry in a few hours. The finest hair brushes are
-not damaged at all by this treatment, which is commonly
-used by painters.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Preparation of the Bromoil Inks.</span>—The
-preparation of the bromoil inks is very simple. The following
-are necessary:</p>
-
-<ul>
-<li>Linseed oil varnish of the thickest consistency;</li>
-<li>Powder colors;</li>
-<li>A rubbing plate;</li>
-<li>A pestle;</li>
-<li>A springy spatula (palette knife);</li>
-<li>A stiff spatula, the so-called ink knife (putty knife).</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>The following sections will give the necessary information
-as to the properties and nature of each item in
-this small arsenal.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Varnish.</span>—Only such varnish should be used
-as is prepared from linseed oil and chemically pure. Its
-color should be light to brownish-yellow or at most reddish-brown.
-Dark brown or blackish-brown varnish
-points to adulteration. The smell is that of linseed oil
-and is not exactly pleasant, but it should not smell badly.
-In the latter case one may reckon with certainty on the
-addition of fish or resinous oil. One principal requisite
-of this varnish is that it should be absolutely <i>clear</i>.
-The varnish is produced of various consistency, from<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_182"></a>[182]</span>
-quite fluid to quite viscous, and <i>this is one of the principal
-properties, to which the bromoil printer must pay
-special attention, for every degree of consistency demands
-and must have only one definite quantity of
-color</i>, otherwise the resultant ink will not satisfy the desired
-end. More as to this later.</p>
-
-<p>I used for all my experiments and later for all actual
-mixing the linseed oil varnishes, No. 1 and No. 2 (chemically
-pure) of the firm of Kast &amp; Ehinger, of Stuttgart,
-which have always given me excellent results, without
-failures. Excellent also is the somewhat less stiff “collotype
-varnish.” But any other varnish, if it only has
-the right consistency and is not adulterated, must also
-give good inks, though great care must also be taken
-as to clearness and color.</p>
-
-<p>Warning should be made against oils similar to varnish,
-which can be recognized by a cloudy appearance
-and a very unpleasant rancid odor. They harden very
-quickly and thus become useless and are very costly.</p>
-
-<p>The stiff varnish is very viscous, like thick syrup.
-In the cold it thickens with the formation of a thin skin
-on the surface. On a hot water bath, it again obtains
-its original character. Well corked up, good varnish will
-keep for years; it even becomes better by long storage.
-It is most convenient to fill the varnish into small wide-mouthed
-bottles, holding from 20 to 40 g (about an
-ounce), with ground-in stoppers, as one can note its appearance
-at any time through the glass. In taking the
-varnish out of the bottle, care must be taken that none
-gets on the inside of the neck, or else the bottle can only
-be opened with difficulty through the varnish gumming
-it up.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Powder Colors.</span>—Only such colors should be used<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_183"></a>[183]</span>
-as are fast both to light and air. The following may be
-selected with absolute certainty:</p>
-
-<ul>
-<li>For black: bone black, ivory black, crayon sauce;</li>
-<li>For brown: burnt umber, burnt sienna, burnt dark ochre;</li>
-<li>For yellow: cadmium, light and dark, yellow ochre, light and dark;</li>
-<li>For red: English red, light and dark, Indian red;</li>
-<li>For blue: indigo, ultramarine, cobalt blue;</li>
-<li>For green: cobalt green, light and dark, Bohemian and Veronese earth;</li>
-<li>For white tones: zinc white.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>The bromoil printer obviously does not need all these.
-One representative of each group will be quite sufficient,
-and I should state that when colors are obtainable in
-both light and dark shades, the light one should always
-be chosen.</p>
-
-<p>The colors must be very finely ground; it will not be
-necessary, or only exceptionally, to prepare the powder
-colors oneself, for they can be obtained commercially in
-every high grade store dealing in painters’ materials.
-If, however, this becomes necessary, then the lumps of
-color should be crushed on a stone or glass with a flat
-muller, and the coarse granular masses thus formed
-kneaded with a little water, or, better still, some alcohol
-and then thoroughly ground. The mass should be allowed
-to dry thoroughly and the process repeated two or
-three times. <i>The finer the powder is rubbed up in this
-way the finer the tone it will give.</i> The <i>coarse</i> color
-powders, often found in drug stores, are not suitable for
-our purpose; they are used more for industrial purposes.</p>
-
-<p><i>Aniline</i> colors, or those brightened with anilines, should
-be absolutely avoided, as they stain the gelatine and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_184"></a>[184]</span>
-thus spoil the print. On the other hand I call the attention
-of all bromoil printers to the <i>pastel colors</i>, which
-can be used with excellent results. They offer many
-advantages over the powder colors, since among the
-hundreds of color shades, in which they can be obtained,
-it is easy to choose that which is most suited for the
-subject. The tints are ready to use, while with the
-powder colors the desired tint can only be obtained by
-mixtures. These colors have the further advantage of
-covering much more strongly, even to obtaining brush
-texture; they are somewhat more difficult to apply to
-the print, because of the fact that they are mixed with
-a medium which is from its nature not so well adapted
-to our process. Those, however, who have well mastered
-the brush technique, will easily overcome this small
-hindrance.</p>
-
-<p>If the pastel colors are used one should only take
-those of reliable manufacture, such as those made according
-to Mengs’ formulas, which are everywhere
-obtainable under the name of <i>Meng’s pastel pencils</i>,
-though this does not mean that those of other makes
-will not give excellent results.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">The Rubbing Plate.</span>—For this we use a thick
-plate glass slab, ground on one side, about 15 by 20 cm
-(6 × 8 in.).</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Pestle or Muller.</span>—A pestle of glass is the best.
-The head must be round, not flattish, and have a matt
-surface.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Spatulas.</span>—It is necessary to have a flexible spatula
-(palette knife) about 1 cm (⅜ in.) wide and a stiff one,
-an ink or putty knife, about 4 to 5 cm (1½ to 2 in.) wide.</p>
-
-<p>Now that we have become conversant with all the
-necessary materials, I come to the:</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_185"></a>[185]</span></p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Practice of Ink Grinding.</span>—As I have mentioned
-above, the purpose of the work is to obtain an ink of
-as stiff a character as possible. To this purpose, after
-the vessel in which the varnish is kept has been allowed
-to stand at least 10 minutes in hot water, or an hour in
-winter, we remove from it by means of a wood or glass
-rod a very small quantity of the varnish, spread it on
-a glass plate and rub it with the pestle so that it covers
-a surface of 3 to four qcm (½-¾ sq. in.). To the varnish
-thus spread out we add with the flexible spatula
-a small quantity, about as much as will lie on the end
-of a pocket knife blade, of the powder color and rub
-it with the pestle until certain that the color is absolutely
-mixed in. If too little color has been taken, more
-should be added and rubbed again until a firm doughy
-mass is obtained which has a <i>slaty and not oily gloss</i>,
-and can scarcely be worked with the pestle. Now with
-the springy spatula the whole ink mass is pushed
-together from the edges to the middle to make a little
-heap, and the ink that remains on the pestle scraped
-off and added to it; the whole mass should then be
-again worked up with the pestle and this procedure repeated
-two or three times. Then the ink is ready. It
-must be so hard that a brush set into a small quantity
-of the ink that has been taken from the heap with the
-stiff spatula and spread out in a thin film, neither takes
-up the ink nor gives it up again to white paper. In
-order to make it fit for use, one must add to this thin
-film <i>one</i> small drop, not more, of pure linseed or poppy
-oil, petroleum, light copper-plate printing varnish, or
-medium, and mix it well with the ink with the stiff
-spatula. Petroleum can be highly recommended for the
-softening medium. One can use the ordinary lamp<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_186"></a>[186]</span>
-petroleum, but the so-called purified petroleum is better.
-It ought only to be added to the ink drop by drop.
-Now the brush will take up and give up the ink. If it
-should not be sufficiently soft, the procedure should be
-repeated, but always carefully, so that too much linseed
-oil is not added and thus the ink made too soft. If we
-use the pastel instead of the powder colors it is not
-necessary to break these up first. Small pieces broken
-from the pencils dissolve readily in the varnish. It
-would seem permissible to assume that the whole work
-of dilution with linseed oil could be saved by not adding
-so much color to the varnish, but by proceeding with
-the inking-up as soon as the ink is taken up by the
-brush, <i>but this is not the case</i>.</p>
-
-<p>As I have stated above under “Varnish,” every degree
-of consistency of the varnish requires a definite
-quantity of color. If one adds too little color, the paste
-will be too soft for bromoil printing, and cannot be
-spread. Too much color is hardly possible with the
-stiffest consistency; the limit lies when the color no
-longer dissolves in the varnish. Too little, on the other
-hand, results in the ink smearing on the print. <i>It is,
-therefore, absolutely necessary</i> in using very thick <i>varnish</i>
-to <i>absolutely saturate</i> it with color. <i>Not going far enough
-in this direction</i>, or the omission of the preliminary
-warming of the varnish, <i>are the only sources of failure</i>.
-In working with varnish of lighter consistency, it will
-be necessary to stop the addition of color as soon as the
-slaty gloss appears.</p>
-
-<p>If the grinding of the ink were to require as long as
-it takes to read this description, the waste of time would
-be considerable. Actually the whole work may be
-carried out in two or three minutes if one uses the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_187"></a>[187]</span>
-methods suggested, and after a little experience is
-gained, which soon comes after a few trials. Long before
-the water for the bromoil print is hot, the ink will
-be ready.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Ink Mixing.</span>—As it is not always possible to use
-existing colors, and it is necessary in many cases to alter
-the shades for artistic effects, the basic colors must be
-diluted with other colors. This can be effected in many
-ways, best by adding another color to the predominant
-color powder during the mixing. <i>Bone black</i> is specially
-valuable for this purpose. This is by itself an unpleasant
-color, for it is a discordant brown-black which can
-hardly be used alone. If other colors, however, are
-added to this bone black it produces beautiful tones.
-Thus, for instance, the addition of a minimum of blue
-(indigo or ultramarine) gives a <i>deep, velvety black</i>; if
-a <i>little</i> more blue is added, we obtain a beautiful blue-black.
-A little bone black mixed with burnt umber
-gives a fine <i>warm black</i>, and so on.</p>
-
-<p>The tone of crayon sauce is especially beautiful, if it
-is used without the addition of any other color, and
-especially that quality obtainable under the name of
-<i>Sauce Velours</i> is particularly excellent.</p>
-
-<p>Another kind of color mixture is that in which black
-is taken as <i>the fundamental color</i> (which is desirable
-when it is not desired to mix up ink for each print) and
-then instead of diluting the <i>stiff</i> ink with linseed oil or
-other diluent, an ordinary good copper-plate ink or
-even ordinary <i>oil colors</i> are used. By this method of
-working I can shade and soften in one operation, and it
-is highly advisable to use it when it is desired to obtain
-different tints easily. The method of mixing is very important
-and I will therefore give some examples. If<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_188"></a>[188]</span>
-to the stiff black ink (bone black), I add a little indigo
-<i>oil</i> color, I have at once a deep black; the addition of
-vandyke brown or burnt umber gives a magnificent
-brown; a fine dark green is obtained with light cadmium;
-this dark green becomes blue-green when I
-add a little indigo. An admixture of caput mortuum
-shows violet tones; red tube colors, such as Indian or
-Pompeian red, ochre, etc., give various reddish brown
-nuances. These additions can be varied in manifold
-ways, dependent only on what tube colors are at hand.
-It is strictly necessary, however, that only the least possible
-quantity of tube color should be added, about as
-much as the head of a good-sized pin, to keep the ink
-from becoming too soft and going beyond the desired
-tint. When a suitable shade has been attained, all
-further dilution must be effected with linseed oil, petroleum,
-etc. When I specially recommended the Mussini
-or Fiedler colors, it was because they are prepared with
-resin oils and are therefore specially suitable for our
-purpose. But all other <i>good</i> oil colors can be used.
-When I write briefly only <i>oil colors</i>, I mean obviously
-<i>artists’ oil colors</i>, and not others which may be used for
-other purposes than for artistic painting.</p>
-
-<p>Finally the black may be diluted with linseed oil to
-the usable consistency of hard ink and also diluted on
-another part of the palette with oil color or copper-plate
-ink of another shade to the consistency of a soft ink,
-and then both colors may be mixed either on the print or
-in the brush.</p>
-
-<p>Very fine gradations may also be produced as follows:
-the bromoil print is pigmented as usual to obtain as
-<i>clear</i> shadows and <i>clean</i> high lights as possible, with not
-too high a relief. When the print is completely finished,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_189"></a>[189]</span>
-it should be placed in a 2 per cent cold solution of ammonia,
-this allowed to act for two minutes and then
-rinsed for one minute in clean water. Then the print,
-which is considerably swollen, should be very carefully
-dried off, so that no ink comes off on the cloth, and the
-latter leaves no imprint of its structure. Now the whole
-print is gone over with a clean brush, on which is a <i>very
-little pure oil color</i>. By thus using light, transparent
-(<i>lasur</i>) colors, and only such ought to be used for this
-purpose, the print may be given an extremely delicate
-film of ink, through which the first image shines with
-full vigor. This gives an effect similar to that which
-the gum printer obtains by multiple printing.</p>
-
-<p>According to whether the whole or only parts of the
-print are gone over with the “lasur” color, the most
-varied effects are obtained, such as deepening of the
-shadows, or lowering of the high lights, or both.</p>
-
-<p>It is naturally impossible to describe this process exactly
-in print. Much must be left to artistic feeling,
-without which hair-raising color discords will probably
-be produced. Still, in order to give the beginner
-some starting point, it may be mentioned that black,
-brown or red tones may be easily treated with inks
-shaded towards grey, blue with pure grey, and so on.</p>
-
-<p>The following summary of color mixtures for the beginner
-is also given: <i>red-brown</i> is obtained by mixing
-bone black, Indian red, and possibly dark alizarin lake;
-<i>violet</i> results from bone black with red and blue; <i>dark
-green</i>, from black, cadmium and blue; <i>brownish-green</i>,
-from black and indigo; <i>bright green</i>, from a little black
-with cadmium and indigo; <i>red chalk</i>, from black, brown
-and Indian red.</p>
-
-<p>The individual tints will obviously vary considerably,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_190"></a>[190]</span>
-according as more or less of any given color is taken.
-This is entirely a matter of taste and must be left to the
-judgment of the individual.</p>
-
-<p>When the stiff ink is ready on the glass plate, it is
-advisable to carry out all further manipulations on a
-white porcelain palette or tile, because the mixtures can
-be much more easily judged in tone and consistency on
-these white supports. The mixtures are best made with
-the stiff spatula (putty knife).</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Permanency.</span>—The permanency of home-made inks
-prepared by oneself is satisfactory if they are preserved
-from dust and air. My inks have kept for periods exceeding
-three months, with the most satisfactory results.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter illowp75" id="figure4" style="max-width: 25em;">
- <img class="w100" src="images/figure4.jpg" alt="" />
- <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 4</span></p>
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Ink-Grinding Machines.</span>—For all ordinary purposes<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_191"></a>[191]</span>
-the inks prepared in the manner just described
-are perfectly satisfactory. For inks, however, which
-must be extremely fine this method of mixing is not
-sufficient, therefore, I had a small machine constructed
-(Fig. 4), which consists of two rollers turning in opposite
-directions. The hand-ground inks are placed on
-these rollers and kneaded with strong pressure for two
-or three minutes. The whole machine is 25 cm high and
-20 cm wide (10 × 8 in.), and can be conveniently
-fastened on the corner of any table. The resultant inks
-are of a fineness and quality which have not been bettered
-by large manufacturers.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">Additions to the Inks.</span>—If it is desired that the
-inks should dry matt on the bromoil print, so that the
-defatting with benzol may be omitted, then one should
-add to the home-made inks a small quantity of one of
-the following mixtures:</p>
-
-<p>(a) Beeswax 1 g (15 gr.); melt by heat and add
-with stirring 20 drops of linseed oil. As it cools a salve-like
-mass is formed. Or:</p>
-
-<p>(b) 1 g (15 gr.) kieselguhr (infusorial earth) rubbed
-up with linseed oil to a quite thin fluid paste.</p>
-
-<p>It should be noted that these mixtures, in consequence
-of their content of linseed oil, make the inks softer.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="box">
-
-<div class="double-underline">
-
-<p class="center larger">Books on Photography</p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>Optics for Photographers, by Hans Harting, Ph.D. Translated
-by Frank R. Fraprie, S.M., F.R.P.S. 232 pages. Cloth, $2.50.</p>
-
-<p>Chemistry for Photographers, by William R. Flint. 2nd edition.
-218 pages. Cloth, $2.50.</p>
-
-<p>Pictorial Composition in Photography, by Arthur Hammond.
-234 pages, 49 illustrations. Cloth, $3.50.</p>
-
-<p>Photo-Engraving Primer, by Stephen H. Horgan. 81 pages.
-Cloth, $1.50.</p>
-
-<p>Cash from Your Camera. Edited by Frank R. Fraprie, S.M.,
-F.R.P.S. 87 pages. Paper, $1.00.</p>
-
-<p>Pictorial Landscape Photography, by the Photo Pictorialists of
-Buffalo. 252 pages, 55 illustrations. Cloth, $3.50.</p>
-
-<p>Photographic Amusements, by Walter E. Woodbury. 9th edition.
-128 pages, 100 illustrations. Cloth, $1.50.</p>
-
-<p>Practical Color Photography, by E. J. Wall, F.C.S., F.R.P.S.
-248 pages. Cloth, $3.00.</p>
-
-<p>Bromoil Printing and Bromoil Transfer, by Dr. Emil Mayer.
-Translated by Frank R. Fraprie, S.M., F.R.P.S. 199 pages.
-Cloth, $2.50.</p>
-
-<p class="center">PRACTICAL PHOTOGRAPHY SERIES<br />
-Edited by Frank R. Fraprie, S.M., F.R.P.S.<br />
-Editor of <i>American Photography</i></p>
-
-<table>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">1.</td>
- <td>The Secret of Exposure.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">2.</td>
- <td>Beginners’ Troubles.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">3.</td>
- <td>How to Choose and Use a Lens.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">4.</td>
- <td>How to Make Prints in Color.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">5.</td>
- <td>How to Make Enlargements.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">6.</td>
- <td>How to Make Portraits.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">7.</td>
- <td>How to Make Lantern Slides.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">8.</td>
- <td>The Elements of Photography.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">9.</td>
- <td>Practical Retouching.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">10.</td>
- <td>Practical Printing Processes.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdr">11.</td>
- <td>Modern Development.</td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-
-<p class="center"><i>Each volume sold separately.</i> Cloth, $1.00; paper, 50 cents.</p>
-
-<p>American Photography Exposure Tables, 101st thousand. Cloth,
-35 cents.</p>
-
-<p>Thermo Development Chart. 25 cents.</p>
-
-<p><i>American Photography</i>, a monthly magazine, representing all that
-its name implies. 25 cents a copy. $2.50 a year.</p>
-
-<p class="center smaller">PUBLISHED BY<br />
-<span class="larger">American Photographic Publishing Co.</span><br />
-428 Newbury St., Boston 17, Massachusetts</p>
-
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BROMOIL PRINTING AND BROMOIL TRANSFER ***</div>
-<div style='text-align:left'>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Updated editions will replace the previous one&#8212;the old editions will
-be renamed.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
-States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG&#8482;
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away&#8212;you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-</div>
-
-<div style='margin-top:1em; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE</div>
-<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE</div>
-<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-To protect the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase &#8220;Project
-Gutenberg&#8221;), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person
-or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.B. &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (&#8220;the
-Foundation&#8221; or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg&#8482; work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work (any work
-on which the phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; appears, or with which the
-phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-</div>
-
-<blockquote>
- <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
- other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
- whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
- of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
- at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
- are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws
- of the country where you are located before using this eBook.
- </div>
-</blockquote>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase &#8220;Project
-Gutenberg&#8221; associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg&#8482; License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg&#8482;.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; License.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work in a format
-other than &#8220;Plain Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg&#8482; website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original &#8220;Plain
-Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg&#8482; works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-provided that:
-</div>
-
-<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'>
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &#8226; You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, &#8220;Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation.&#8221;
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &#8226; You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
- works.
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &#8226; You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &#8226; You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works.
- </div>
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain &#8220;Defects,&#8221; such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the &#8220;Right
-of Replacement or Refund&#8221; described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you &#8216;AS-IS&#8217;, WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg&#8482;&#8217;s
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg&#8482; collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg&#8482; and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation&#8217;s EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state&#8217;s laws.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Foundation&#8217;s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation&#8217;s website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
-public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
-visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg&#8482;,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
-</div>
-
-</div>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/old/69127-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/69127-h/images/cover.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index ea053d9..0000000
--- a/old/69127-h/images/cover.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/69127-h/images/figure1.jpg b/old/69127-h/images/figure1.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index cedb703..0000000
--- a/old/69127-h/images/figure1.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/69127-h/images/figure2.jpg b/old/69127-h/images/figure2.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index dfaba33..0000000
--- a/old/69127-h/images/figure2.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/69127-h/images/figure3.jpg b/old/69127-h/images/figure3.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index e8ed285..0000000
--- a/old/69127-h/images/figure3.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/69127-h/images/figure4.jpg b/old/69127-h/images/figure4.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 74bff67..0000000
--- a/old/69127-h/images/figure4.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/69127-h/images/imprimatur.jpg b/old/69127-h/images/imprimatur.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 0352850..0000000
--- a/old/69127-h/images/imprimatur.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ